ld: Add '--require-defined' command line option.
[deliverable/binutils-gdb.git] / ld / ld.texinfo
1 \input texinfo
2 @setfilename ld.info
3 @c Copyright (C) 1991-2015 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
4 @syncodeindex ky cp
5 @c man begin INCLUDE
6 @include configdoc.texi
7 @c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
8 @include bfdver.texi
9 @c man end
10
11 @c @smallbook
12
13 @macro gcctabopt{body}
14 @code{\body\}
15 @end macro
16
17 @c man begin NAME
18 @ifset man
19 @c Configure for the generation of man pages
20 @set UsesEnvVars
21 @set GENERIC
22 @set ARM
23 @set C6X
24 @set H8300
25 @set HPPA
26 @set I960
27 @set M68HC11
28 @set M68K
29 @set MIPS
30 @set MMIX
31 @set MSP430
32 @set NDS32
33 @set NIOSII
34 @set POWERPC
35 @set POWERPC64
36 @set Renesas
37 @set SPU
38 @set TICOFF
39 @set WIN32
40 @set XTENSA
41 @end ifset
42 @c man end
43
44 @ifnottex
45 @dircategory Software development
46 @direntry
47 * Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
48 @end direntry
49 @end ifnottex
50
51 @copying
52 This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
53 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
54 @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
55 @end ifset
56 version @value{VERSION}.
57
58 Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2015 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
59
60 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
61 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
62 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
63 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
64 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
65 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
66 @end copying
67 @iftex
68 @finalout
69 @setchapternewpage odd
70 @settitle The GNU linker
71 @titlepage
72 @title The GNU linker
73 @sp 1
74 @subtitle @code{ld}
75 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
76 @subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
77 @end ifset
78 @subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
79 @author Steve Chamberlain
80 @author Ian Lance Taylor
81 @page
82
83 @tex
84 {\parskip=0pt
85 \hfill Red Hat Inc\par
86 \hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
87 \hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
88 \hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
89 }
90 \global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
91 @end tex
92
93 @vskip 0pt plus 1filll
94 @c man begin COPYRIGHT
95 Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2015 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
96
97 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
98 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
99 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
100 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
101 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
102 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
103 @c man end
104
105 @end titlepage
106 @end iftex
107 @contents
108 @c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
109
110 @ifnottex
111 @node Top
112 @top LD
113 This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
114 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
115 @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
116 @end ifset
117 version @value{VERSION}.
118
119 This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
120 Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included
121 in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
122
123 @menu
124 * Overview:: Overview
125 * Invocation:: Invocation
126 * Scripts:: Linker Scripts
127 @ifset GENERIC
128 * Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
129 @end ifset
130 @ifclear GENERIC
131 @ifset H8300
132 * H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
133 @end ifset
134 @ifset Renesas
135 * Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
136 @end ifset
137 @ifset I960
138 * i960:: ld and the Intel 960 family
139 @end ifset
140 @ifset ARM
141 * ARM:: ld and the ARM family
142 @end ifset
143 @ifset M68HC11
144 * M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
145 @end ifset
146 @ifset HPPA
147 * HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
148 @end ifset
149 @ifset M68K
150 * M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
151 @end ifset
152 @ifset MIPS
153 * MIPS:: ld and MIPS family
154 @end ifset
155 @ifset POWERPC
156 * PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
157 @end ifset
158 @ifset POWERPC64
159 * PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
160 @end ifset
161 @ifset SPU
162 * SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
163 @end ifset
164 @ifset TICOFF
165 * TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
166 @end ifset
167 @ifset WIN32
168 * Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
169 @end ifset
170 @ifset XTENSA
171 * Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
172 @end ifset
173 @end ifclear
174 @ifclear SingleFormat
175 * BFD:: BFD
176 @end ifclear
177 @c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
178
179 * Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
180 * MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
181 * GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
182 * LD Index:: LD Index
183 @end menu
184 @end ifnottex
185
186 @node Overview
187 @chapter Overview
188
189 @cindex @sc{gnu} linker
190 @cindex what is this?
191
192 @ifset man
193 @c man begin SYNOPSIS
194 ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
195 @c man end
196
197 @c man begin SEEALSO
198 ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
199 the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
200 @file{ld}.
201 @c man end
202 @end ifset
203
204 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
205
206 @command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
207 their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
208 compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
209
210 @command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
211 a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
212 to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
213
214 @ifset man
215 @c For the man only
216 This man page does not describe the command language; see the
217 @command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
218 language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
219 @end ifset
220
221 @ifclear SingleFormat
222 This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
223 to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
224 write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
225 @code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
226 available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
227 @end ifclear
228
229 Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
230 linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
231 execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
232 @command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
233 (or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
234
235 @c man end
236
237 @node Invocation
238 @chapter Invocation
239
240 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
241
242 The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
243 and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
244 you have many choices to control its behavior.
245
246 @c man end
247
248 @ifset UsesEnvVars
249 @menu
250 * Options:: Command Line Options
251 * Environment:: Environment Variables
252 @end menu
253
254 @node Options
255 @section Command Line Options
256 @end ifset
257
258 @cindex command line
259 @cindex options
260
261 @c man begin OPTIONS
262
263 The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
264 practice few of them are used in any particular context.
265 @cindex standard Unix system
266 For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
267 object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
268 link a file @code{hello.o}:
269
270 @smallexample
271 ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
272 @end smallexample
273
274 This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
275 result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
276 the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
277 directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
278
279 Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
280 point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
281 as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
282 which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
283 files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
284 different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
285 occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
286 option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
287 noted in the descriptions below.
288
289 @cindex object files
290 Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
291 together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
292 options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
293 an option and its argument.
294
295 Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
296 specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
297 and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
298 are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
299 message @samp{No input files}.
300
301 If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
302 assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
303 augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
304 linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
305 permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
306 or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
307 @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
308 script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
309 extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
310 to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
311 the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
312
313 For options whose names are a single letter,
314 option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
315 whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
316 option that requires them.
317
318 For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
319 precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
320 @samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
321 this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
322 only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
323 @samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
324 name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
325 output.
326
327 Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
328 option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
329 immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
330 @samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
331 Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
332 accepted.
333
334 Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
335 (e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command line options should be
336 prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
337 compiler driver) like this:
338
339 @smallexample
340 gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
341 @end smallexample
342
343 This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
344 silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link. Confusion
345 may also arise when passing options that require values through a
346 driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as
347 a separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
348 and the argument to the compiler. In this case, it is simplest to use
349 the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
350
351 @smallexample
352 gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
353 @end smallexample
354
355 Here is a table of the generic command line switches accepted by the GNU
356 linker:
357
358 @table @gcctabopt
359 @include at-file.texi
360
361 @kindex -a @var{keyword}
362 @item -a @var{keyword}
363 This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
364 argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
365 @samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
366 @samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
367 to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
368
369 @kindex --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
370 @item --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
371 Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_AUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
372 @var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
373 specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_AUDIT}
374 will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. If the linker
375 finds an object with an audit entry while searching for shared libraries,
376 it will add a corresponding @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry in the output file.
377 This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit
378 interface.
379
380 @ifset I960
381 @cindex architectures
382 @kindex -A @var{arch}
383 @item -A @var{architecture}
384 @kindex --architecture=@var{arch}
385 @itemx --architecture=@var{architecture}
386 In the current release of @command{ld}, this option is useful only for the
387 Intel 960 family of architectures. In that @command{ld} configuration, the
388 @var{architecture} argument identifies the particular architecture in
389 the 960 family, enabling some safeguards and modifying the
390 archive-library search path. @xref{i960,,@command{ld} and the Intel 960
391 family}, for details.
392
393 Future releases of @command{ld} may support similar functionality for
394 other architecture families.
395 @end ifset
396
397 @ifclear SingleFormat
398 @cindex binary input format
399 @kindex -b @var{format}
400 @kindex --format=@var{format}
401 @cindex input format
402 @cindex input format
403 @item -b @var{input-format}
404 @itemx --format=@var{input-format}
405 @command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
406 file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
407 @samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
408 that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
409 configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
410 to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
411 default input format the most usual format on each machine.
412 @var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
413 supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
414 formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
415 @xref{BFD}.
416
417 You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
418 binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
419 linking object files of different formats), by including
420 @samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
421 particular format.
422
423 The default format is taken from the environment variable
424 @code{GNUTARGET}.
425 @ifset UsesEnvVars
426 @xref{Environment}.
427 @end ifset
428 You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
429 @code{TARGET};
430 @ifclear man
431 see @ref{Format Commands}.
432 @end ifclear
433 @end ifclear
434
435 @kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
436 @kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
437 @cindex compatibility, MRI
438 @item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
439 @itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
440 For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
441 files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
442 @ifclear man
443 @ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
444 @end ifclear
445 @ifset man
446 the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
447 @end ifset
448 Introduce MRI script files with
449 the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
450 scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
451 If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
452 specified by any @samp{-L} options.
453
454 @cindex common allocation
455 @kindex -d
456 @kindex -dc
457 @kindex -dp
458 @item -d
459 @itemx -dc
460 @itemx -dp
461 These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
462 compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
463 even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
464 script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
465 @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
466
467 @kindex --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
468 @kindex -P @var{AUDITLIB}
469 @item --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
470 @itemx -P @var{AUDITLIB}
471 Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
472 @var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
473 specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_DEPAUDIT}
474 will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. This
475 option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit interface.
476 The -P option is provided for Solaris compatibility.
477
478 @cindex entry point, from command line
479 @kindex -e @var{entry}
480 @kindex --entry=@var{entry}
481 @item -e @var{entry}
482 @itemx --entry=@var{entry}
483 Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
484 program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
485 named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
486 and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
487 base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
488 @samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
489 and other ways of specifying the entry point.
490
491 @kindex --exclude-libs
492 @item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
493 Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
494 exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
495 @code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
496 automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
497 port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
498 explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
499 option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
500 be treated as hidden.
501
502 @kindex --exclude-modules-for-implib
503 @item --exclude-modules-for-implib @var{module},@var{module},...
504 Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which symbols
505 should not be automatically exported, but which should be copied wholesale
506 into the import library being generated during the link. The module names
507 may be delimited by commas or colons, and must match exactly the filenames
508 used by @command{ld} to open the files; for archive members, this is simply
509 the member name, but for object files the name listed must include and
510 match precisely any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
511 command-line. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port
512 of the linker. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
513 regardless of this option.
514
515 @cindex dynamic symbol table
516 @kindex -E
517 @kindex --export-dynamic
518 @kindex --no-export-dynamic
519 @item -E
520 @itemx --export-dynamic
521 @itemx --no-export-dynamic
522 When creating a dynamically linked executable, using the @option{-E}
523 option or the @option{--export-dynamic} option causes the linker to add
524 all symbols to the dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the
525 set of symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
526
527 If you do not use either of these options (or use the
528 @option{--no-export-dynamic} option to restore the default behavior), the
529 dynamic symbol table will normally contain only those symbols which are
530 referenced by some dynamic object mentioned in the link.
531
532 If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
533 back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
534 dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
535 linking the program itself.
536
537 You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
538 be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
539 See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
540
541 Note that this option is specific to ELF targeted ports. PE targets
542 support a similar function to export all symbols from a DLL or EXE; see
543 the description of @samp{--export-all-symbols} below.
544
545 @ifclear SingleFormat
546 @cindex big-endian objects
547 @cindex endianness
548 @kindex -EB
549 @item -EB
550 Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
551
552 @cindex little-endian objects
553 @kindex -EL
554 @item -EL
555 Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
556 @end ifclear
557
558 @kindex -f @var{name}
559 @kindex --auxiliary=@var{name}
560 @item -f @var{name}
561 @itemx --auxiliary=@var{name}
562 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
563 to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
564 table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
565 symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
566
567 If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
568 run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
569 the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
570 first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
571 @var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
572 in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
573 Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
574 implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
575 machine specific performance.
576
577 This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
578 will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
579
580 @kindex -F @var{name}
581 @kindex --filter=@var{name}
582 @item -F @var{name}
583 @itemx --filter=@var{name}
584 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
585 the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
586 of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
587 on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
588
589 If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
590 run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
591 dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
592 filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
593 found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
594 used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
595 @var{name}.
596
597 Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
598 toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
599 object files.
600 @ifclear SingleFormat
601 The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
602 @option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
603 @code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
604 environment variable.
605 @end ifclear
606 The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
607 creating an ELF shared object.
608
609 @cindex finalization function
610 @kindex -fini=@var{name}
611 @item -fini=@var{name}
612 When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
613 executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
614 address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
615 the function to call.
616
617 @kindex -g
618 @item -g
619 Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
620
621 @kindex -G @var{value}
622 @kindex --gpsize=@var{value}
623 @cindex object size
624 @item -G @var{value}
625 @itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
626 Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
627 @var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
628 MIPS ELF that support putting large and small objects into different
629 sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
630
631 @cindex runtime library name
632 @kindex -h @var{name}
633 @kindex -soname=@var{name}
634 @item -h @var{name}
635 @itemx -soname=@var{name}
636 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
637 the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
638 which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
639 linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
640 field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
641
642 @kindex -i
643 @cindex incremental link
644 @item -i
645 Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
646
647 @cindex initialization function
648 @kindex -init=@var{name}
649 @item -init=@var{name}
650 When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
651 executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
652 of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
653 function to call.
654
655 @cindex archive files, from cmd line
656 @kindex -l @var{namespec}
657 @kindex --library=@var{namespec}
658 @item -l @var{namespec}
659 @itemx --library=@var{namespec}
660 Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
661 list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
662 If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
663 will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherwise it
664 will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
665
666 On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
667 files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
668 and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
669 called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
670 @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
671 indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
672 to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
673 @var{filename}.
674
675 The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
676 specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
677 was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
678 command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
679 archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
680 the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
681
682 See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
683 archives multiple times.
684
685 You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
686
687 @ifset GENERIC
688 This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
689 if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
690 behaviour of the AIX linker.
691 @end ifset
692
693 @cindex search directory, from cmd line
694 @kindex -L @var{dir}
695 @kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
696 @item -L @var{searchdir}
697 @itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
698 Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
699 for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
700 option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
701 in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
702 on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
703 @option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
704 order in which the options appear. @option{-L} options do not affect
705 how @command{ld} searches for a linker script unless @option{-T}
706 option is specified.
707
708 If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=}, then the @code{=} will be replaced
709 by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, controlled by the @samp{--sysroot} option, or
710 specified when the linker is configured.
711
712 @ifset UsesEnvVars
713 The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
714 @samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
715 some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
716 @end ifset
717
718 The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
719 @code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
720 at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
721
722 @cindex emulation
723 @kindex -m @var{emulation}
724 @item -m @var{emulation}
725 Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
726 emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
727
728 If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
729 @code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
730
731 Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
732 configured.
733
734 @cindex link map
735 @kindex -M
736 @kindex --print-map
737 @item -M
738 @itemx --print-map
739 Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
740 information about the link, including the following:
741
742 @itemize @bullet
743 @item
744 Where object files are mapped into memory.
745 @item
746 How common symbols are allocated.
747 @item
748 All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
749 which caused the archive member to be brought in.
750 @item
751 The values assigned to symbols.
752
753 Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
754 involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
755 have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
756 linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
757 of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
758 the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
759 linker script containing:
760
761 @smallexample
762 foo = 1
763 foo = foo * 4
764 foo = foo + 8
765 @end smallexample
766
767 will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
768 option is used:
769
770 @smallexample
771 0x00000001 foo = 0x1
772 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
773 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
774 @end smallexample
775
776 See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
777 scripts.
778 @end itemize
779
780 @kindex -n
781 @cindex read-only text
782 @cindex NMAGIC
783 @kindex --nmagic
784 @item -n
785 @itemx --nmagic
786 Turn off page alignment of sections, and disable linking against shared
787 libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
788 mark the output as @code{NMAGIC}.
789
790 @kindex -N
791 @kindex --omagic
792 @cindex read/write from cmd line
793 @cindex OMAGIC
794 @item -N
795 @itemx --omagic
796 Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
797 not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
798 libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
799 mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
800 is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
801 specification published by Microsoft.
802
803 @kindex --no-omagic
804 @cindex OMAGIC
805 @item --no-omagic
806 This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
807 sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
808 be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
809 shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
810
811 @kindex -o @var{output}
812 @kindex --output=@var{output}
813 @cindex naming the output file
814 @item -o @var{output}
815 @itemx --output=@var{output}
816 Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
817 option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
818 script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
819
820 @kindex -O @var{level}
821 @cindex generating optimized output
822 @item -O @var{level}
823 If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
824 the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
825 should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
826 option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
827 the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
828 no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
829 of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
830
831 @kindex --push-state
832 @cindex push state governing input file handling
833 @item --push-state
834 The @option{--push-state} allows to preserve the current state of the
835 flags which govern the input file handling so that they can all be
836 restored with one corresponding @option{--pop-state} option.
837
838 The option which are covered are: @option{-Bdynamic}, @option{-Bstatic},
839 @option{-dn}, @option{-dy}, @option{-call_shared}, @option{-non_shared},
840 @option{-static}, @option{-N}, @option{-n}, @option{--whole-archive},
841 @option{--no-whole-archive}, @option{-r}, @option{-Ur},
842 @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}, @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries},
843 @option{--as-needed}, @option{--no-as-needed}, and @option{-a}.
844
845 One target for this option are specifications for @file{pkg-config}. When
846 used with the @option{--libs} option all possibly needed libraries are
847 listed and then possibly linked with all the time. It is better to return
848 something as follows:
849
850 @smallexample
851 -Wl,--push-state,--as-needed -libone -libtwo -Wl,--pop-state
852 @end smallexample
853
854 @kindex --pop-state
855 @cindex pop state governing input file handling
856 Undoes the effect of --push-state, restores the previous values of the
857 flags governing input file handling.
858
859 @kindex -q
860 @kindex --emit-relocs
861 @cindex retain relocations in final executable
862 @item -q
863 @itemx --emit-relocs
864 Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
865 Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
866 order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
867 in larger executables.
868
869 This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
870
871 @kindex --force-dynamic
872 @cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
873 @item --force-dynamic
874 Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
875 to VxWorks targets.
876
877 @cindex partial link
878 @cindex relocatable output
879 @kindex -r
880 @kindex --relocatable
881 @item -r
882 @itemx --relocatable
883 Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
884 turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
885 linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
886 magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
887 @code{OMAGIC}.
888 @c ; see @option{-N}.
889 If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
890 linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
891 constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
892
893 When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
894 partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
895 relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
896 example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
897 with input files in other formats at all.
898
899 This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
900
901 @kindex -R @var{file}
902 @kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
903 @cindex symbol-only input
904 @item -R @var{filename}
905 @itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
906 Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
907 relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
908 to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
909 programs. You may use this option more than once.
910
911 For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
912 followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
913 the @option{-rpath} option.
914
915 @kindex -s
916 @kindex --strip-all
917 @cindex strip all symbols
918 @item -s
919 @itemx --strip-all
920 Omit all symbol information from the output file.
921
922 @kindex -S
923 @kindex --strip-debug
924 @cindex strip debugger symbols
925 @item -S
926 @itemx --strip-debug
927 Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
928
929 @kindex -t
930 @kindex --trace
931 @cindex input files, displaying
932 @item -t
933 @itemx --trace
934 Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them.
935
936 @kindex -T @var{script}
937 @kindex --script=@var{script}
938 @cindex script files
939 @item -T @var{scriptfile}
940 @itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
941 Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
942 @command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
943 @var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
944 output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
945 the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
946 specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
947 options accumulate.
948
949 @kindex -dT @var{script}
950 @kindex --default-script=@var{script}
951 @cindex script files
952 @item -dT @var{scriptfile}
953 @itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
954 Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
955
956 This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
957 processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
958 command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
959 @option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
960 behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
961 command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
962 the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
963 @samp{gcc}).
964
965 @kindex -u @var{symbol}
966 @kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
967 @cindex undefined symbol
968 @item -u @var{symbol}
969 @itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
970 Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
971 symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
972 modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
973 different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
974 option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
975
976 If this option is being used to force additional modules to be pulled
977 into the link, and if it is an error for the symbol to remain
978 undefined, then the option @option{--require-defined} should be used
979 instead.
980
981 @kindex --require-defined=@var{symbol}
982 @cindex symbols, require defined
983 @cindex defined symbol
984 @item --require-defined=@var{symbol}
985 Require that @var{symbol} is defined in the output file. This option
986 is the same as option @option{--undefined} except that if @var{symbol}
987 is not defined in the output file then the linker will issue an error
988 and exit. The same effect can be achieved in a linker script by using
989 @code{EXTERN}, @code{ASSERT} and @code{DEFINED} together. This option
990 can be used multiple times to require additional symbols.
991
992 @kindex -Ur
993 @cindex constructors
994 @item -Ur
995 For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
996 @samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
997 turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
998 @emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
999 It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
1000 with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
1001 be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
1002 @samp{-r} for the others.
1003
1004 @kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1005 @item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1006 Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
1007 @var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
1008 missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
1009 specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
1010 multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
1011 input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
1012 in a linker script.
1013
1014 @kindex -v
1015 @kindex -V
1016 @kindex --version
1017 @cindex version
1018 @item -v
1019 @itemx --version
1020 @itemx -V
1021 Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
1022 lists the supported emulations.
1023
1024 @kindex -x
1025 @kindex --discard-all
1026 @cindex deleting local symbols
1027 @item -x
1028 @itemx --discard-all
1029 Delete all local symbols.
1030
1031 @kindex -X
1032 @kindex --discard-locals
1033 @cindex local symbols, deleting
1034 @item -X
1035 @itemx --discard-locals
1036 Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
1037 system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
1038 or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
1039
1040 @kindex -y @var{symbol}
1041 @kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1042 @cindex symbol tracing
1043 @item -y @var{symbol}
1044 @itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1045 Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
1046 option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
1047 to prepend an underscore.
1048
1049 This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
1050 don't know where the reference is coming from.
1051
1052 @kindex -Y @var{path}
1053 @item -Y @var{path}
1054 Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
1055 for Solaris compatibility.
1056
1057 @kindex -z @var{keyword}
1058 @item -z @var{keyword}
1059 The recognized keywords are:
1060 @table @samp
1061
1062 @item combreloc
1063 Combines multiple reloc sections and sorts them to make dynamic symbol
1064 lookup caching possible.
1065
1066 @item defs
1067 Disallows undefined symbols in object files. Undefined symbols in
1068 shared libraries are still allowed.
1069
1070 @item execstack
1071 Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
1072
1073 @item global
1074 This option is only meaningful when building a shared object. It makes
1075 the symbols defined by this shared object available for symbol resolution
1076 of subsequently loaded libraries.
1077
1078 @item initfirst
1079 This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
1080 It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
1081 before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
1082 the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
1083 the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
1084 objects.
1085
1086 @item interpose
1087 Marks the object that its symbol table interposes before all symbols
1088 but the primary executable.
1089
1090 @item lazy
1091 When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1092 dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
1093 the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
1094 Lazy binding is the default.
1095
1096 @item loadfltr
1097 Marks the object that its filters be processed immediately at
1098 runtime.
1099
1100 @item muldefs
1101 Allows multiple definitions.
1102
1103 @item nocombreloc
1104 Disables multiple reloc sections combining.
1105
1106 @item nocopyreloc
1107 Disable linker generated .dynbss variables used in place of variables
1108 defined in shared libraries. May result in dynamic text relocations.
1109
1110 @item nodefaultlib
1111 Marks the object that the search for dependencies of this object will
1112 ignore any default library search paths.
1113
1114 @item nodelete
1115 Marks the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
1116
1117 @item nodlopen
1118 Marks the object not available to @code{dlopen}.
1119
1120 @item nodump
1121 Marks the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
1122
1123 @item noexecstack
1124 Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1125
1126 @item text
1127 Treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1128
1129 @item notext
1130 Don't treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1131
1132 @item textoff
1133 Don't treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1134
1135 @item norelro
1136 Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1137
1138 @item now
1139 When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1140 dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
1141 when the shared library is linked to using dlopen, instead of
1142 deferring function call resolution to the point when the function is
1143 first called.
1144
1145 @item origin
1146 Marks the object may contain $ORIGIN.
1147
1148 @item relro
1149 Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1150
1151 @item max-page-size=@var{value}
1152 Set the emulation maximum page size to @var{value}.
1153
1154 @item common-page-size=@var{value}
1155 Set the emulation common page size to @var{value}.
1156
1157 @item stack-size=@var{value}
1158 Specify a stack size for in an ELF @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment.
1159 Specifying zero will override any default non-zero sized
1160 @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment creation.
1161
1162 @item bndplt
1163 Always generate BND prefix in PLT entries. Supported for Linux/x86_64.
1164
1165 @item noextern-protected-data
1166 Don't treat protected data symbol as external when building shared
1167 library. This option overrides linker backend default. It can be used
1168 to workaround incorrect relocations against protected data symbols
1169 generated by compiler. Updates on protected data symbols by another
1170 module aren't visibile to the resulting shared library. Supported for
1171 i386 and x86-64.
1172
1173 @end table
1174
1175 Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
1176
1177 @kindex -(
1178 @cindex groups of archives
1179 @item -( @var{archives} -)
1180 @itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1181 The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
1182 either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1183
1184 The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1185 references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1186 the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
1187 archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1188 object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1189 would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
1190 they all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
1191 resolved.
1192
1193 Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
1194 it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1195 more archives.
1196
1197 @kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1198 @kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1199 @item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1200 @itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1201 Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
1202 recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
1203 and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
1204 the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
1205 behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1206 so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1207 restore the old behaviour.
1208
1209 @kindex --as-needed
1210 @kindex --no-as-needed
1211 @item --as-needed
1212 @itemx --no-as-needed
1213 This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
1214 on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally
1215 the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1216 on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
1217 needed or not. @option{--as-needed} causes a DT_NEEDED tag to only be
1218 emitted for a library that @emph{at that point in the link} satisfies a
1219 non-weak undefined symbol reference from a regular object file or, if
1220 the library is not found in the DT_NEEDED lists of other needed libraries, a
1221 non-weak undefined symbol reference from another needed dynamic library.
1222 Object files or libraries appearing on the command line @emph{after}
1223 the library in question do not affect whether the library is seen as
1224 needed. This is similar to the rules for extraction of object files
1225 from archives. @option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
1226
1227 @kindex --add-needed
1228 @kindex --no-add-needed
1229 @item --add-needed
1230 @itemx --no-add-needed
1231 These two options have been deprecated because of the similarity of
1232 their names to the @option{--as-needed} and @option{--no-as-needed}
1233 options. They have been replaced by @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1234 and @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
1235
1236 @kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1237 @item -assert @var{keyword}
1238 This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1239
1240 @kindex -Bdynamic
1241 @kindex -dy
1242 @kindex -call_shared
1243 @item -Bdynamic
1244 @itemx -dy
1245 @itemx -call_shared
1246 Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
1247 for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
1248 default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
1249 for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
1250 multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
1251 @option{-l} options which follow it.
1252
1253 @kindex -Bgroup
1254 @item -Bgroup
1255 Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1256 section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1257 object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
1258 @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
1259 only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
1260
1261 @kindex -Bstatic
1262 @kindex -dn
1263 @kindex -non_shared
1264 @kindex -static
1265 @item -Bstatic
1266 @itemx -dn
1267 @itemx -non_shared
1268 @itemx -static
1269 Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
1270 platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
1271 variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
1272 may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
1273 library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
1274 option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
1275 option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
1276 shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1277 references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
1278 libraries.
1279
1280 @kindex -Bsymbolic
1281 @item -Bsymbolic
1282 When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1283 definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
1284 for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
1285 within the shared library. This option is only meaningful on ELF
1286 platforms which support shared libraries.
1287
1288 @kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1289 @item -Bsymbolic-functions
1290 When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
1291 symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
1292 This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
1293 libraries.
1294
1295 @kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1296 @item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1297 Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
1298 typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1299 global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1300 within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1301 to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1302 in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1303 which support shared libraries.
1304
1305 The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1306 scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1307
1308 @kindex --dynamic-list-data
1309 @item --dynamic-list-data
1310 Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1311
1312 @kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1313 @item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1314 Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
1315 is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1316
1317 @kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1318 @item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1319 Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1320
1321 @kindex --check-sections
1322 @kindex --no-check-sections
1323 @item --check-sections
1324 @itemx --no-check-sections
1325 Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
1326 been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
1327 perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1328 suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
1329 allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
1330 restored by using the command line switch @option{--check-sections}.
1331 Section overlap is not usually checked for relocatable links. You can
1332 force checking in that case by using the @option{--check-sections}
1333 option.
1334
1335 @kindex --copy-dt-needed-entries
1336 @kindex --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1337 @item --copy-dt-needed-entries
1338 @itemx --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1339 This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries referred to
1340 by DT_NEEDED tags @emph{inside} ELF dynamic libraries mentioned on the
1341 command line. Normally the linker won't add a DT_NEEDED tag to the
1342 output binary for each library mentioned in a DT_NEEDED tag in an
1343 input dynamic library. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1344 specified on the command line however any dynamic libraries that
1345 follow it will have their DT_NEEDED entries added. The default
1346 behaviour can be restored with @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
1347
1348 This option also has an effect on the resolution of symbols in dynamic
1349 libraries. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries} dynamic libraries
1350 mentioned on the command line will be recursively searched, following
1351 their DT_NEEDED tags to other libraries, in order to resolve symbols
1352 required by the output binary. With the default setting however
1353 the searching of dynamic libraries that follow it will stop with the
1354 dynamic library itself. No DT_NEEDED links will be traversed to resolve
1355 symbols.
1356
1357 @cindex cross reference table
1358 @kindex --cref
1359 @item --cref
1360 Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
1361 generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1362 Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1363
1364 The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1365 easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
1366 sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
1367 symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
1368 definition. If the symbol is defined as a common value then any files
1369 where this happens appear next. Finally any files that reference the
1370 symbol are listed.
1371
1372 @cindex common allocation
1373 @kindex --no-define-common
1374 @item --no-define-common
1375 This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1376 The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1377 @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1378
1379 The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1380 the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1381 of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1382 forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1383 Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1384 from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1385 This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1386 and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1387 duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1388 paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1389
1390 @cindex symbols, from command line
1391 @kindex --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1392 @item --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{expression}
1393 Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1394 address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
1395 times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
1396 limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1397 context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1398 symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1399 constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
1400 using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments}).
1401 @emph{Note:} there should be no white space between @var{symbol}, the
1402 equals sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{expression}.
1403
1404 @cindex demangling, from command line
1405 @kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
1406 @kindex --no-demangle
1407 @item --demangle[=@var{style}]
1408 @itemx --no-demangle
1409 These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1410 and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1411 present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1412 underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
1413 mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
1414 different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
1415 to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
1416 demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1417 is set. These options may be used to override the default.
1418
1419 @cindex dynamic linker, from command line
1420 @kindex -I@var{file}
1421 @kindex --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1422 @item -I@var{file}
1423 @itemx --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1424 Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
1425 generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
1426 linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1427 doing.
1428
1429 @kindex --fatal-warnings
1430 @kindex --no-fatal-warnings
1431 @item --fatal-warnings
1432 @itemx --no-fatal-warnings
1433 Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be restored
1434 with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
1435
1436 @kindex --force-exe-suffix
1437 @item --force-exe-suffix
1438 Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1439
1440 If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1441 @code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1442 the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1443 option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1444 Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1445 it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1446
1447 @kindex --gc-sections
1448 @kindex --no-gc-sections
1449 @cindex garbage collection
1450 @item --gc-sections
1451 @itemx --no-gc-sections
1452 Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
1453 targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
1454 performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
1455 @samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line. Note that garbage
1456 collection for COFF and PE format targets is supported, but the
1457 implementation is currently considered to be experimental.
1458
1459 @samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1460 examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
1461 symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1462 command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1463 referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
1464 libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1465 referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1466 the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
1467 relocations. See @samp{--entry} and @samp{--undefined}.
1468
1469 This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
1470 @samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitly
1471 specified either by an @samp{--entry} or @samp{--undefined} option or by
1472 a @code{ENTRY} command in the linker script.
1473
1474 @kindex --print-gc-sections
1475 @kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1476 @cindex garbage collection
1477 @item --print-gc-sections
1478 @itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1479 List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
1480 printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
1481 collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
1482 default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1483 be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1484 line.
1485
1486 @kindex --print-output-format
1487 @cindex output format
1488 @item --print-output-format
1489 Print the name of the default output format (perhaps influenced by
1490 other command-line options). This is the string that would appear
1491 in an @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} linker script command (@pxref{File Commands}).
1492
1493 @kindex --print-memory-usage
1494 @cindex memory usage
1495 @item --print-memory-usage
1496 Print used size, total size and used size of memory regions created with
1497 the @ref{MEMORY} command. This is useful on embedded targets to have a
1498 quick view of amount of free memory. The format of the output has one
1499 headline and one line per region. It is both human readable and easily
1500 parsable by tools. Here is an example of an output:
1501
1502 @smallexample
1503 Memory region Used Size Region Size %age Used
1504 ROM: 256 KB 1 MB 25.00%
1505 RAM: 32 B 2 GB 0.00%
1506 @end smallexample
1507
1508 @cindex help
1509 @cindex usage
1510 @kindex --help
1511 @item --help
1512 Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1513
1514 @kindex --target-help
1515 @item --target-help
1516 Print a summary of all target specific options on the standard output and exit.
1517
1518 @kindex -Map=@var{mapfile}
1519 @item -Map=@var{mapfile}
1520 Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
1521 @option{-M} option, above.
1522
1523 @cindex memory usage
1524 @kindex --no-keep-memory
1525 @item --no-keep-memory
1526 @command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1527 symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
1528 instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
1529 necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
1530 while linking a large executable.
1531
1532 @kindex --no-undefined
1533 @kindex -z defs
1534 @item --no-undefined
1535 @itemx -z defs
1536 Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1537 is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1538 The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1539 behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
1540 libraries being linked in.
1541
1542 @kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1543 @kindex -z muldefs
1544 @item --allow-multiple-definition
1545 @itemx -z muldefs
1546 Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1547 report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1548 first definition will be used.
1549
1550 @kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
1551 @kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
1552 @item --allow-shlib-undefined
1553 @itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
1554 Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
1555 This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1556 determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1557 shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
1558 how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1559
1560 The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
1561 referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to create
1562 an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being used to create
1563 a shared library.
1564
1565 The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
1566 libraries specified at link time are that:
1567
1568 @itemize @bullet
1569 @item
1570 A shared library specified at link time may not be the same as the one
1571 that is available at load time, so the symbol might actually be
1572 resolvable at load time.
1573 @item
1574 There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where undefined
1575 symbols in shared libraries are normal.
1576
1577 The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load time to
1578 select whichever function is most appropriate for the current
1579 architecture. This is used, for example, to dynamically select an
1580 appropriate memset function.
1581 @end itemize
1582
1583 @kindex --no-undefined-version
1584 @item --no-undefined-version
1585 Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1586 it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1587 will be issued instead.
1588
1589 @kindex --default-symver
1590 @item --default-symver
1591 Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1592 exported symbols.
1593
1594 @kindex --default-imported-symver
1595 @item --default-imported-symver
1596 Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1597 imported symbols.
1598
1599 @kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1600 @item --no-warn-mismatch
1601 Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
1602 files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1603 been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
1604 This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
1605 errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1606 have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1607 inappropriate.
1608
1609 @kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1610 @item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1611 Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1612 library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
1613
1614 @kindex --no-whole-archive
1615 @item --no-whole-archive
1616 Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
1617 archive files.
1618
1619 @cindex output file after errors
1620 @kindex --noinhibit-exec
1621 @item --noinhibit-exec
1622 Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1623 Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1624 errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1625 when it issues any error whatsoever.
1626
1627 @kindex -nostdlib
1628 @item -nostdlib
1629 Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1630 command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
1631 (including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1632
1633 @ifclear SingleFormat
1634 @kindex --oformat=@var{output-format}
1635 @item --oformat=@var{output-format}
1636 @command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1637 file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
1638 @samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
1639 object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1640 object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
1641 should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1642 usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1643 name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
1644 list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
1645 command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1646 this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
1647 @end ifclear
1648
1649 @kindex -pie
1650 @kindex --pic-executable
1651 @item -pie
1652 @itemx --pic-executable
1653 @cindex position independent executables
1654 Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
1655 ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
1656 libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
1657 address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
1658 normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1659 defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1660
1661 @kindex -qmagic
1662 @item -qmagic
1663 This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1664
1665 @kindex -Qy
1666 @item -Qy
1667 This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1668
1669 @kindex --relax
1670 @cindex synthesizing linker
1671 @cindex relaxing addressing modes
1672 @cindex --no-relax
1673 @item --relax
1674 @itemx --no-relax
1675 An option with machine dependent effects.
1676 @ifset GENERIC
1677 This option is only supported on a few targets.
1678 @end ifset
1679 @ifset H8300
1680 @xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
1681 @end ifset
1682 @ifset I960
1683 @xref{i960,, @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family}.
1684 @end ifset
1685 @ifset XTENSA
1686 @xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1687 @end ifset
1688 @ifset M68HC11
1689 @xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1690 @end ifset
1691 @ifset NIOSII
1692 @xref{Nios II,,@command{ld} and the Altera Nios II}.
1693 @end ifset
1694 @ifset POWERPC
1695 @xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1696 @end ifset
1697
1698 On some platforms the @samp{--relax} option performs target specific,
1699 global optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves
1700 addressing in the program, such as relaxing address modes,
1701 synthesizing new instructions, selecting shorter version of current
1702 instructions, and combining constant values.
1703
1704 On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1705 debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1706 @ifset GENERIC
1707 This is known to be the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300
1708 family of processors.
1709 @end ifset
1710
1711 @ifset GENERIC
1712 On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1713 but ignored.
1714 @end ifset
1715
1716 On platforms where @samp{--relax} is accepted the option
1717 @samp{--no-relax} can be used to disable the feature.
1718
1719 @cindex retaining specified symbols
1720 @cindex stripping all but some symbols
1721 @cindex symbols, retaining selectively
1722 @kindex --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1723 @item --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1724 Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1725 discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1726 symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
1727 @ifset GENERIC
1728 (such as VxWorks)
1729 @end ifset
1730 where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
1731 run-time memory.
1732
1733 @samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
1734 or symbols needed for relocations.
1735
1736 You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
1737 line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
1738
1739 @ifset GENERIC
1740 @item -rpath=@var{dir}
1741 @cindex runtime library search path
1742 @kindex -rpath=@var{dir}
1743 Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
1744 linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
1745 arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
1746 them to locate shared objects at runtime. The @option{-rpath} option is
1747 also used when locating shared objects which are needed by shared
1748 objects explicitly included in the link; see the description of the
1749 @option{-rpath-link} option. If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an
1750 ELF executable, the contents of the environment variable
1751 @code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it is defined.
1752
1753 The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
1754 SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search patch out of all the
1755 @option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
1756 runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
1757 options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
1758 gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
1759 file systems.
1760
1761 For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
1762 followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
1763 the @option{-rpath} option.
1764 @end ifset
1765
1766 @ifset GENERIC
1767 @cindex link-time runtime library search path
1768 @kindex -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1769 @item -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1770 When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
1771 happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
1772 of the input files.
1773
1774 When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
1775 non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
1776 shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
1777 explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
1778 specifies the first set of directories to search. The
1779 @option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
1780 either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
1781 appearing multiple times.
1782
1783 This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
1784 that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
1785 is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
1786 runtime linker would do.
1787
1788 The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
1789 libraries:
1790 @enumerate
1791 @item
1792 Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
1793 @item
1794 Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
1795 between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
1796 specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
1797 used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
1798 at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
1799 by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
1800 the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
1801 @item
1802 On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
1803 @option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
1804 environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
1805 @item
1806 On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
1807 directories specified using @option{-L} options.
1808 @item
1809 For a native linker, search the contents of the environment
1810 variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
1811 @item
1812 For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
1813 @code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
1814 libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
1815 @code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
1816 @item
1817 The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
1818 @item
1819 For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
1820 exists, the list of directories found in that file.
1821 @end enumerate
1822
1823 If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
1824 warning and continue with the link.
1825 @end ifset
1826
1827 @kindex -shared
1828 @kindex -Bshareable
1829 @item -shared
1830 @itemx -Bshareable
1831 @cindex shared libraries
1832 Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
1833 and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
1834 shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
1835 undefined symbols in the link.
1836
1837 @kindex --sort-common
1838 @item --sort-common
1839 @itemx --sort-common=ascending
1840 @itemx --sort-common=descending
1841 This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
1842 ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
1843 sections. The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
1844 eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
1845 between symbols due to alignment constraints. If no sorting order is
1846 specified, then descending order is assumed.
1847
1848 @kindex --sort-section=name
1849 @item --sort-section=name
1850 This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
1851 patterns in the linker script.
1852
1853 @kindex --sort-section=alignment
1854 @item --sort-section=alignment
1855 This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
1856 patterns in the linker script.
1857
1858 @kindex --split-by-file
1859 @item --split-by-file[=@var{size}]
1860 Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
1861 each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
1862 size of 1 if not given.
1863
1864 @kindex --split-by-reloc
1865 @item --split-by-reloc[=@var{count}]
1866 Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
1867 output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
1868 This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
1869 certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
1870 cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
1871 that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
1872 support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
1873 input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
1874 more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
1875 many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
1876
1877 @kindex --stats
1878 @item --stats
1879 Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
1880 as execution time and memory usage.
1881
1882 @kindex --sysroot=@var{directory}
1883 @item --sysroot=@var{directory}
1884 Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
1885 configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
1886 that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
1887
1888 @kindex --traditional-format
1889 @cindex traditional format
1890 @item --traditional-format
1891 For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
1892 the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
1893 use the traditional format instead.
1894
1895 @cindex dbx
1896 For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
1897 symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
1898 full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
1899 @code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
1900 trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
1901 combine duplicate entries.
1902
1903 @kindex --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
1904 @item --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
1905 Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
1906 address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
1907 times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
1908 line.
1909 @var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
1910 for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
1911 @samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
1912 should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
1913 sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
1914
1915 @kindex -Tbss=@var{org}
1916 @kindex -Tdata=@var{org}
1917 @kindex -Ttext=@var{org}
1918 @cindex segment origins, cmd line
1919 @item -Tbss=@var{org}
1920 @itemx -Tdata=@var{org}
1921 @itemx -Ttext=@var{org}
1922 Same as @option{--section-start}, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
1923 @code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
1924
1925 @kindex -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
1926 @item -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
1927 @cindex text segment origin, cmd line
1928 When creating an ELF executable, it will set the address of the first
1929 byte of the text segment.
1930
1931 @kindex -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
1932 @item -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
1933 @cindex rodata segment origin, cmd line
1934 When creating an ELF executable or shared object for a target where
1935 the read-only data is in its own segment separate from the executable
1936 text, it will set the address of the first byte of the read-only data segment.
1937
1938 @kindex -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
1939 @item -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
1940 @cindex ldata segment origin, cmd line
1941 When creating an ELF executable or shared object for x86-64 medium memory
1942 model, it will set the address of the first byte of the ldata segment.
1943
1944 @kindex --unresolved-symbols
1945 @item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
1946 Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
1947 values for @samp{method}:
1948
1949 @table @samp
1950 @item ignore-all
1951 Do not report any unresolved symbols.
1952
1953 @item report-all
1954 Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
1955
1956 @item ignore-in-object-files
1957 Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
1958 ignore them if they come from regular object files.
1959
1960 @item ignore-in-shared-libs
1961 Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
1962 ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
1963 when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
1964 libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
1965 command line.
1966 @end table
1967
1968 The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
1969 by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
1970
1971 Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
1972 unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
1973 can change this to a warning.
1974
1975 @kindex --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
1976 @cindex verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
1977 @item --dll-verbose
1978 @itemx --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
1979 Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
1980 supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
1981 the linker script being used by the linker. If the optional @var{NUMBER}
1982 argument > 1, plugin symbol status will also be displayed.
1983
1984 @kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
1985 @cindex version script, symbol versions
1986 @item --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
1987 Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
1988 used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
1989 about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
1990 is only fully supported on ELF platforms which support shared libraries;
1991 see @ref{VERSION}. It is partially supported on PE platforms, which can
1992 use version scripts to filter symbol visibility in auto-export mode: any
1993 symbols marked @samp{local} in the version script will not be exported.
1994 @xref{WIN32}.
1995
1996 @kindex --warn-common
1997 @cindex warnings, on combining symbols
1998 @cindex combining symbols, warnings on
1999 @item --warn-common
2000 Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
2001 a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practice,
2002 but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
2003 you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
2004 Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practice, so you may get some
2005 warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
2006
2007 There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
2008
2009 @table @samp
2010 @item int i = 1;
2011 A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
2012 file.
2013
2014 @item extern int i;
2015 An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
2016 There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
2017 variable somewhere.
2018
2019 @item int i;
2020 A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
2021 variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
2022 The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
2023 single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
2024 size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
2025 a definition of the same variable.
2026 @end table
2027
2028 The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
2029 Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
2030 just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
2031 encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
2032 a common symbol.
2033
2034 @enumerate
2035 @item
2036 Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
2037 definition for the symbol.
2038 @smallexample
2039 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2040 overridden by definition
2041 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
2042 @end smallexample
2043
2044 @item
2045 Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
2046 the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
2047 except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
2048 @smallexample
2049 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
2050 overriding common
2051 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
2052 @end smallexample
2053
2054 @item
2055 Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
2056 @smallexample
2057 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
2058 of `@var{symbol}'
2059 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
2060 @end smallexample
2061
2062 @item
2063 Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
2064 @smallexample
2065 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2066 overridden by larger common
2067 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
2068 @end smallexample
2069
2070 @item
2071 Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
2072 the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
2073 encountered in a different order.
2074 @smallexample
2075 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2076 overriding smaller common
2077 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
2078 @end smallexample
2079 @end enumerate
2080
2081 @kindex --warn-constructors
2082 @item --warn-constructors
2083 Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
2084 object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
2085 detect the use of global constructors.
2086
2087 @kindex --warn-multiple-gp
2088 @item --warn-multiple-gp
2089 Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
2090 This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
2091 Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
2092 section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
2093 of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
2094 base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
2095 base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
2096 bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
2097 large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
2098 values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
2099 option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
2100
2101 @kindex --warn-once
2102 @cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
2103 @cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
2104 @item --warn-once
2105 Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
2106 which refers to it.
2107
2108 @kindex --warn-orphan
2109 @kindex --no-warn-orphan
2110 @cindex warnings, on orphan sections
2111 @cindex orphan sections, warnings on
2112 @item --warn-orphan
2113 The @option{--warn-orphan} option tells the linker to generate a
2114 warning message whenever it has to place an orphan section into the
2115 output file. @xref{Orphan Sections}. The @option{--no-warn-orphan}
2116 option restores the default behaviour of just silently placing these
2117 sections.
2118
2119 @kindex --warn-section-align
2120 @cindex warnings, on section alignment
2121 @cindex section alignment, warnings on
2122 @item --warn-section-align
2123 Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
2124 alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
2125 The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
2126 is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
2127 the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
2128
2129 @kindex --warn-shared-textrel
2130 @item --warn-shared-textrel
2131 Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
2132
2133 @kindex --warn-alternate-em
2134 @item --warn-alternate-em
2135 Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code.
2136
2137 @kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
2138 @item --warn-unresolved-symbols
2139 If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
2140 @option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
2141 This option makes it generate a warning instead.
2142
2143 @kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
2144 @item --error-unresolved-symbols
2145 This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
2146 it is reporting unresolved symbols.
2147
2148 @kindex --whole-archive
2149 @cindex including an entire archive
2150 @item --whole-archive
2151 For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
2152 @option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
2153 in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
2154 files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
2155 library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
2156 library. This option may be used more than once.
2157
2158 Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
2159 about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
2160 Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
2161 list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
2162 your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
2163
2164 @kindex --wrap=@var{symbol}
2165 @item --wrap=@var{symbol}
2166 Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
2167 @var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
2168 undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
2169 @var{symbol}.
2170
2171 This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
2172 wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
2173 wishes to call the system function, it should call
2174 @code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
2175
2176 Here is a trivial example:
2177
2178 @smallexample
2179 void *
2180 __wrap_malloc (size_t c)
2181 @{
2182 printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
2183 return __real_malloc (c);
2184 @}
2185 @end smallexample
2186
2187 If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
2188 all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
2189 instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
2190 call the real @code{malloc} function.
2191
2192 You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
2193 links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
2194 you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
2195 file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
2196 call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
2197
2198 @kindex --eh-frame-hdr
2199 @item --eh-frame-hdr
2200 Request creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr} section and ELF
2201 @code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
2202
2203 @kindex --ld-generated-unwind-info
2204 @item --no-ld-generated-unwind-info
2205 Request creation of @code{.eh_frame} unwind info for linker
2206 generated code sections like PLT. This option is on by default
2207 if linker generated unwind info is supported.
2208
2209 @kindex --enable-new-dtags
2210 @kindex --disable-new-dtags
2211 @item --enable-new-dtags
2212 @itemx --disable-new-dtags
2213 This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
2214 systems may not understand them. If you specify
2215 @option{--enable-new-dtags}, the new dynamic tags will be created as needed
2216 and older dynamic tags will be omitted.
2217 If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
2218 created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
2219 those options are only available for ELF systems.
2220
2221 @kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
2222 @item --hash-size=@var{number}
2223 Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
2224 close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
2225 time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
2226 increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
2227 value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
2228
2229 @kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
2230 @item --hash-style=@var{style}
2231 Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
2232 @code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
2233 new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
2234 the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
2235 hash tables. The default is @code{sysv}.
2236
2237 @kindex --compress-debug-sections=none
2238 @kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2239 @kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2240 @kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
2241 @item --compress-debug-sections=none
2242 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2243 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2244 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
2245 On ELF platforms , these options control how DWARF debug sections are
2246 compressed using zlib. @option{--compress-debug-sections=none} doesn't
2247 compress DWARF debug sections.
2248 @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu} compresses DWARF debug
2249 sections and rename debug section names to begin with @samp{.zdebug}
2250 instead of @samp{.debug}. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib}
2251 and @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi}
2252 compress DWARF debug sections with SHF_COMPRESSED from the ELF ABI.
2253
2254 @kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
2255 @item --reduce-memory-overheads
2256 This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
2257 linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
2258 for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2259 about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
2260
2261 Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
2262 1021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
2263 run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2264 has been used.
2265
2266 The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
2267 enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
2268
2269 @kindex --build-id
2270 @kindex --build-id=@var{style}
2271 @item --build-id
2272 @itemx --build-id=@var{style}
2273 Request the creation of a @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section
2274 or a @code{.build-id} COFF section. The contents of the note are
2275 unique bits identifying this linked file. @var{style} can be
2276 @code{uuid} to use 128 random bits, @code{sha1} to use a 160-bit
2277 @sc{SHA1} hash on the normative parts of the output contents,
2278 @code{md5} to use a 128-bit @sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of
2279 the output contents, or @code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit
2280 string specified as an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and
2281 @code{:} characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style}
2282 is omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
2283
2284 The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2285 that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2286 unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
2287 to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
2288 file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2289 string identifying the original linked file does not change.
2290
2291 Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2292 @code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
2293 @end table
2294
2295 @c man end
2296
2297 @subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
2298
2299 @c man begin OPTIONS
2300
2301 The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
2302 the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2303 normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2304 use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2305 @code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2306 like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2307 symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2308 object file).
2309
2310 In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
2311 support additional command line options that are specific to the i386
2312 PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
2313 values by either a space or an equals sign.
2314
2315 @table @gcctabopt
2316
2317 @kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2318 @item --add-stdcall-alias
2319 If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2320 as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
2321 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2322
2323 @kindex --base-file
2324 @item --base-file @var{file}
2325 Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2326 addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2327 @file{dlltool}.
2328 [This is an i386 PE specific option]
2329
2330 @kindex --dll
2331 @item --dll
2332 Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
2333 @option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
2334 file.
2335 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2336
2337 @kindex --enable-long-section-names
2338 @kindex --disable-long-section-names
2339 @item --enable-long-section-names
2340 @itemx --disable-long-section-names
2341 The PE variants of the Coff object format add an extension that permits
2342 the use of section names longer than eight characters, the normal limit
2343 for Coff. By default, these names are only allowed in object files, as
2344 fully-linked executable images do not carry the Coff string table required
2345 to support the longer names. As a GNU extension, it is possible to
2346 allow their use in executable images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)
2347 disallow it in object files, by using these two options. Executable images
2348 generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard, carrying
2349 as they do a string table, and may generate confusing output when examined
2350 with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file viewers and dumpers. However,
2351 GDB relies on the use of PE long section names to find Dwarf-2 debug
2352 information sections in an executable image at runtime, and so if neither
2353 option is specified on the command-line, @command{ld} will enable long
2354 section names, overriding the default and technically correct behaviour,
2355 when it finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable
2356 image and not stripping symbols.
2357 [This option is valid for all PE targeted ports of the linker]
2358
2359 @kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2360 @kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2361 @item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2362 @itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2363 If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
2364 do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
2365 only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2366 resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
2367 undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2368 @code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2369 to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
2370 warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2371 import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
2372 to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
2373 feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
2374 @option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
2375 mismatches are considered to be errors.
2376 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2377
2378 @kindex --leading-underscore
2379 @kindex --no-leading-underscore
2380 @item --leading-underscore
2381 @itemx --no-leading-underscore
2382 For most targets default symbol-prefix is an underscore and is defined
2383 in target's description. By this option it is possible to
2384 disable/enable the default underscore symbol-prefix.
2385
2386 @cindex DLLs, creating
2387 @kindex --export-all-symbols
2388 @item --export-all-symbols
2389 If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2390 be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
2391 otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
2392 explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2393 attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2394 option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
2395 @code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
2396 @code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
2397 exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2398 re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2399 such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2400 @code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
2401 @code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2402 Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2403 not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
2404 extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
2405 (obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
2406 These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
2407 @code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
2408 @code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
2409 @code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
2410 @code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
2411 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2412
2413 @kindex --exclude-symbols
2414 @item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
2415 Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2416 exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
2417 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2418
2419 @kindex --exclude-all-symbols
2420 @item --exclude-all-symbols
2421 Specifies no symbols should be automatically exported.
2422 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2423
2424 @kindex --file-alignment
2425 @item --file-alignment
2426 Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
2427 file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
2428 512.
2429 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2430
2431 @cindex heap size
2432 @kindex --heap
2433 @item --heap @var{reserve}
2434 @itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
2435 Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2436 to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1MB reserved, 4K
2437 committed.
2438 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2439
2440 @cindex image base
2441 @kindex --image-base
2442 @item --image-base @var{value}
2443 Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
2444 the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2445 is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2446 your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2447 other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2448 for dlls.
2449 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2450
2451 @kindex --kill-at
2452 @item --kill-at
2453 If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2454 symbols before they are exported.
2455 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2456
2457 @kindex --large-address-aware
2458 @item --large-address-aware
2459 If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
2460 header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
2461 greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
2462 or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2463 section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2464 [This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2465
2466 @kindex --disable-large-address-aware
2467 @item --disable-large-address-aware
2468 Reverts the effect of a previous @samp{--large-address-aware} option.
2469 This is useful if @samp{--large-address-aware} is always set by the compiler
2470 driver (e.g. Cygwin gcc) and the executable does not support virtual
2471 addresses greater than 2 gigabytes.
2472 [This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2473
2474 @kindex --major-image-version
2475 @item --major-image-version @var{value}
2476 Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
2477 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2478
2479 @kindex --major-os-version
2480 @item --major-os-version @var{value}
2481 Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
2482 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2483
2484 @kindex --major-subsystem-version
2485 @item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
2486 Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
2487 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2488
2489 @kindex --minor-image-version
2490 @item --minor-image-version @var{value}
2491 Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
2492 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2493
2494 @kindex --minor-os-version
2495 @item --minor-os-version @var{value}
2496 Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
2497 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2498
2499 @kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2500 @item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
2501 Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
2502 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2503
2504 @cindex DEF files, creating
2505 @cindex DLLs, creating
2506 @kindex --output-def
2507 @item --output-def @var{file}
2508 The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2509 file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
2510 (which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2511 library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2512 automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
2513 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2514
2515 @cindex DLLs, creating
2516 @kindex --out-implib
2517 @item --out-implib @var{file}
2518 The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain an
2519 import lib corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This
2520 import lib (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a}
2521 may be used to link clients against the generated DLL; this behaviour
2522 makes it possible to skip a separate @code{dlltool} import library
2523 creation step.
2524 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2525
2526 @kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2527 @item --enable-auto-image-base
2528 @itemx --enable-auto-image-base=@var{value}
2529 Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, optionally starting with base
2530 @var{value}, unless one is specified using the @code{--image-base} argument.
2531 By using a hash generated from the dllname to create unique image bases
2532 for each DLL, in-memory collisions and relocations which can delay program
2533 execution are avoided.
2534 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2535
2536 @kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2537 @item --disable-auto-image-base
2538 Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
2539 user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2540 default.
2541 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2542
2543 @cindex DLLs, linking to
2544 @kindex --dll-search-prefix
2545 @item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
2546 When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
2547 search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
2548 @code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
2549 between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2550 uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
2551 @code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
2552 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2553
2554 @kindex --enable-auto-import
2555 @item --enable-auto-import
2556 Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
2557 DATA imports from DLLs, and create the necessary thunking symbols when
2558 building the import libraries with those DATA exports. Note: Use of the
2559 'auto-import' extension will cause the text section of the image file
2560 to be made writable. This does not conform to the PE-COFF format
2561 specification published by Microsoft.
2562
2563 Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2564 data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2565 placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
2566 around a problem with consts that is described here:
2567 http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2568
2569 Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2570 see this message:
2571
2572 "variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
2573 documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2574
2575 This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2576 ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
2577 allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2578 fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2579 constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
2580 multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2581 this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
2582 of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2583 the warning, and exit.
2584
2585 There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2586 data type of the exported variable:
2587
2588 One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2589 of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
2590 this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2591
2592 A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2593 that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
2594 there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
2595 a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
2596
2597 @example
2598 extern type extern_array[];
2599 extern_array[1] -->
2600 @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2601 @end example
2602
2603 or
2604
2605 @example
2606 extern type extern_array[];
2607 extern_array[1] -->
2608 @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2609 @end example
2610
2611 For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2612 is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
2613
2614 @example
2615 extern struct s extern_struct;
2616 extern_struct.field -->
2617 @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2618 @end example
2619
2620 or
2621
2622 @example
2623 extern long long extern_ll;
2624 extern_ll -->
2625 @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2626 @end example
2627
2628 A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
2629 'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
2630 @code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practice that
2631 requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
2632 building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2633 merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
2634 between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
2635 constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2636
2637 Original:
2638 @example
2639 --foo.h
2640 extern int arr[];
2641 --foo.c
2642 #include "foo.h"
2643 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2644 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2645 @}
2646 @end example
2647
2648 Solution 1:
2649 @example
2650 --foo.h
2651 extern int arr[];
2652 --foo.c
2653 #include "foo.h"
2654 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2655 /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2656 volatile int *parr = arr;
2657 printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2658 @}
2659 @end example
2660
2661 Solution 2:
2662 @example
2663 --foo.h
2664 /* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2665 #if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2666 !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2667 #define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
2668 #else
2669 #define FOO_IMPORT
2670 #endif
2671 extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
2672 --foo.c
2673 #include "foo.h"
2674 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2675 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2676 @}
2677 @end example
2678
2679 A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
2680 library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
2681 for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
2682 functions).
2683 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2684
2685 @kindex --disable-auto-import
2686 @item --disable-auto-import
2687 Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
2688 @code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
2689 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2690
2691 @kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2692 @item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2693 If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
2694 that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
2695 a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
2696 environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
2697 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2698
2699 @kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2700 @item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2701 Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from
2702 DLLs.
2703 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2704
2705 @kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
2706 @item --enable-extra-pe-debug
2707 Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
2708 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2709
2710 @kindex --section-alignment
2711 @item --section-alignment
2712 Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
2713 addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
2714 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2715
2716 @cindex stack size
2717 @kindex --stack
2718 @item --stack @var{reserve}
2719 @itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
2720 Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2721 to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2MB reserved, 4K
2722 committed.
2723 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2724
2725 @kindex --subsystem
2726 @item --subsystem @var{which}
2727 @itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
2728 @itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
2729 Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
2730 legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
2731 @code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
2732 the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
2733 @var{which}.
2734 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2735
2736 The following options set flags in the @code{DllCharacteristics} field
2737 of the PE file header:
2738 [These options are specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2739
2740 @kindex --high-entropy-va
2741 @item --high-entropy-va
2742 Image is compatible with 64-bit address space layout randomization
2743 (ASLR).
2744
2745 @kindex --dynamicbase
2746 @item --dynamicbase
2747 The image base address may be relocated using address space layout
2748 randomization (ASLR). This feature was introduced with MS Windows
2749 Vista for i386 PE targets.
2750
2751 @kindex --forceinteg
2752 @item --forceinteg
2753 Code integrity checks are enforced.
2754
2755 @kindex --nxcompat
2756 @item --nxcompat
2757 The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention.
2758 This feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE targets.
2759
2760 @kindex --no-isolation
2761 @item --no-isolation
2762 Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image.
2763
2764 @kindex --no-seh
2765 @item --no-seh
2766 The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from
2767 this image.
2768
2769 @kindex --no-bind
2770 @item --no-bind
2771 Do not bind this image.
2772
2773 @kindex --wdmdriver
2774 @item --wdmdriver
2775 The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model.
2776
2777 @kindex --tsaware
2778 @item --tsaware
2779 The image is Terminal Server aware.
2780
2781 @kindex --insert-timestamp
2782 @item --insert-timestamp
2783 @itemx --no-insert-timestamp
2784 Insert a real timestamp into the image. This is the default behaviour
2785 as it matches legacy code and it means that the image will work with
2786 other, proprietary tools. The problem with this default is that it
2787 will result in slightly different images being produced each tiem the
2788 same sources are linked. The option @option{--no-insert-timestamp}
2789 can be used to insert a zero value for the timestamp, this ensuring
2790 that binaries produced from indentical sources will compare
2791 identically.
2792 @end table
2793
2794 @c man end
2795
2796 @ifset C6X
2797 @subsection Options specific to C6X uClinux targets
2798
2799 @c man begin OPTIONS
2800
2801 The C6X uClinux target uses a binary format called DSBT to support shared
2802 libraries. Each shared library in the system needs to have a unique index;
2803 all executables use an index of 0.
2804
2805 @table @gcctabopt
2806
2807 @kindex --dsbt-size
2808 @item --dsbt-size @var{size}
2809 This option sets the number of entires in the DSBT of the current executable
2810 or shared library to @var{size}. The default is to create a table with 64
2811 entries.
2812
2813 @kindex --dsbt-index
2814 @item --dsbt-index @var{index}
2815 This option sets the DSBT index of the current executable or shared library
2816 to @var{index}. The default is 0, which is appropriate for generating
2817 executables. If a shared library is generated with a DSBT index of 0, the
2818 @code{R_C6000_DSBT_INDEX} relocs are copied into the output file.
2819
2820 @kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
2821 The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent
2822 exidx entries in frame unwind info.
2823
2824 @end table
2825
2826 @c man end
2827 @end ifset
2828
2829 @ifset M68HC11
2830 @subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
2831
2832 @c man begin OPTIONS
2833
2834 The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
2835 memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
2836
2837 @table @gcctabopt
2838
2839 @kindex --no-trampoline
2840 @item --no-trampoline
2841 This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
2842 is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
2843 instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
2844
2845 @kindex --bank-window
2846 @item --bank-window @var{name}
2847 This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
2848 the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
2849 The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
2850 paging and addresses within the memory window.
2851
2852 @end table
2853
2854 @c man end
2855 @end ifset
2856
2857 @ifset M68K
2858 @subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
2859
2860 @c man begin OPTIONS
2861
2862 The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
2863 when linking for 68K targets.
2864
2865 @table @gcctabopt
2866
2867 @kindex --got
2868 @item --got=@var{type}
2869 This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
2870 @var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
2871 @samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
2872 Info entry for @file{ld}.
2873
2874 @end table
2875
2876 @c man end
2877 @end ifset
2878
2879 @ifset MIPS
2880 @subsection Options specific to MIPS targets
2881
2882 @c man begin OPTIONS
2883
2884 The following options are supported to control microMIPS instruction
2885 generation when linking for MIPS targets.
2886
2887 @table @gcctabopt
2888
2889 @kindex --insn32
2890 @item --insn32
2891 @kindex --no-insn32
2892 @itemx --no-insn32
2893 These options control the choice of microMIPS instructions used in code
2894 generated by the linker, such as that in the PLT or lazy binding stubs,
2895 or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is used, then the linker only uses
2896 32-bit instruction encodings. By default or if @samp{--no-insn32} is
2897 used, all instruction encodings are used, including 16-bit ones where
2898 possible.
2899
2900 @end table
2901
2902 @c man end
2903 @end ifset
2904
2905 @ifset UsesEnvVars
2906 @node Environment
2907 @section Environment Variables
2908
2909 @c man begin ENVIRONMENT
2910
2911 You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
2912 @ifclear SingleFormat
2913 @code{GNUTARGET},
2914 @end ifclear
2915 @code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
2916
2917 @ifclear SingleFormat
2918 @kindex GNUTARGET
2919 @cindex default input format
2920 @code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
2921 use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
2922 of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
2923 @code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
2924 of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
2925 attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
2926 this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
2927 there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
2928 object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
2929 BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
2930 in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
2931 @end ifclear
2932
2933 @kindex LDEMULATION
2934 @cindex default emulation
2935 @cindex emulation, default
2936 @code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
2937 @samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
2938 behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
2939 available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
2940 the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
2941 variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
2942 linker was configured.
2943
2944 @kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
2945 @cindex demangling, default
2946 Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
2947 @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
2948 default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
2949 a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
2950 may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
2951 options.
2952
2953 @c man end
2954 @end ifset
2955
2956 @node Scripts
2957 @chapter Linker Scripts
2958
2959 @cindex scripts
2960 @cindex linker scripts
2961 @cindex command files
2962 Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
2963 written in the linker command language.
2964
2965 The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
2966 the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
2967 the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
2968 more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
2969 direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
2970 described below.
2971
2972 The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
2973 yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
2974 linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command line option
2975 to display the default linker script. Certain command line options,
2976 such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
2977
2978 You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
2979 line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
2980 default linker script.
2981
2982 You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
2983 to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
2984 Linker Scripts}.
2985
2986 @menu
2987 * Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
2988 * Script Format:: Linker Script Format
2989 * Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
2990 * Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
2991 * Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
2992 * SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
2993 * MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
2994 * PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
2995 * VERSION:: VERSION Command
2996 * Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
2997 * Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
2998 @end menu
2999
3000 @node Basic Script Concepts
3001 @section Basic Linker Script Concepts
3002 @cindex linker script concepts
3003 We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
3004 describe the linker script language.
3005
3006 The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
3007 file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
3008 @dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
3009 The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
3010 purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
3011 among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
3012 section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
3013 in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
3014
3015 Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
3016 also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
3017 contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which means that
3018 the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
3019 A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
3020 area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
3021 loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
3022 which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
3023 of debugging information.
3024
3025 Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
3026 first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
3027 the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
3028 @dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
3029 section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
3030 same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
3031 is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
3032 (this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
3033 based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
3034 RAM address would be the VMA.
3035
3036 You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
3037 program with the @samp{-h} option.
3038
3039 Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
3040 @dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
3041 has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
3042 information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
3043 will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
3044 static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
3045 referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
3046
3047 You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
3048 program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
3049 option.
3050
3051 @node Script Format
3052 @section Linker Script Format
3053 @cindex linker script format
3054 Linker scripts are text files.
3055
3056 You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
3057 either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
3058 symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
3059 generally ignored.
3060
3061 Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
3062 If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
3063 otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
3064 double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
3065 file name.
3066
3067 You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
3068 @samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
3069 to whitespace.
3070
3071 @node Simple Example
3072 @section Simple Linker Script Example
3073 @cindex linker script example
3074 @cindex example of linker script
3075 Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
3076
3077 The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
3078 @samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
3079 memory layout of the output file.
3080
3081 The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
3082 describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
3083 code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
3084 @samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
3085 Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
3086 your input files.
3087
3088 For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
3089 0x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
3090 linker script which will do that:
3091 @smallexample
3092 SECTIONS
3093 @{
3094 . = 0x10000;
3095 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
3096 . = 0x8000000;
3097 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3098 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
3099 @}
3100 @end smallexample
3101
3102 You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
3103 followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
3104 descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
3105
3106 The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
3107 sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
3108 counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
3109 other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
3110 current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
3111 incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
3112 @samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
3113
3114 The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
3115 required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
3116 after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
3117 which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
3118 wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
3119 means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
3120
3121 Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
3122 @samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
3123 @samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
3124
3125 The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
3126 the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
3127 at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
3128 output section, the value of the location counter will be
3129 @samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
3130 effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
3131 immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
3132
3133 The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
3134 alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
3135 example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
3136 sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
3137 may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
3138 sections.
3139
3140 That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
3141
3142 @node Simple Commands
3143 @section Simple Linker Script Commands
3144 @cindex linker script simple commands
3145 In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
3146
3147 @menu
3148 * Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
3149 * File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
3150 @ifclear SingleFormat
3151 * Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
3152 @end ifclear
3153
3154 * REGION_ALIAS:: Assign alias names to memory regions
3155 * Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
3156 @end menu
3157
3158 @node Entry Point
3159 @subsection Setting the Entry Point
3160 @kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3161 @cindex start of execution
3162 @cindex first instruction
3163 @cindex entry point
3164 The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
3165 point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
3166 entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
3167 @smallexample
3168 ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3169 @end smallexample
3170
3171 There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
3172 entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
3173 stopping when one of them succeeds:
3174 @itemize @bullet
3175 @item
3176 the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
3177 @item
3178 the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
3179 @item
3180 the value of a target specific symbol, if it is defined; For many
3181 targets this is @code{start}, but PE and BeOS based systems for example
3182 check a list of possible entry symbols, matching the first one found.
3183 @item
3184 the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
3185 @item
3186 The address @code{0}.
3187 @end itemize
3188
3189 @node File Commands
3190 @subsection Commands Dealing with Files
3191 @cindex linker script file commands
3192 Several linker script commands deal with files.
3193
3194 @table @code
3195 @item INCLUDE @var{filename}
3196 @kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
3197 @cindex including a linker script
3198 Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
3199 be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
3200 with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
3201 10 levels deep.
3202
3203 You can place @code{INCLUDE} directives at the top level, in @code{MEMORY} or
3204 @code{SECTIONS} commands, or in output section descriptions.
3205
3206 @item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3207 @itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3208 @kindex INPUT(@var{files})
3209 @cindex input files in linker scripts
3210 @cindex input object files in linker scripts
3211 @cindex linker script input object files
3212 The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
3213 in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
3214
3215 For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
3216 a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
3217 then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
3218
3219 In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
3220 script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
3221
3222 In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
3223 with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
3224 located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
3225 for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. Otherwise, the linker will try to
3226 open the file in the current directory. If it is not found, the
3227 linker will search through the archive library search path.
3228 The @dfn{sysroot prefix} can also be forced by specifying @code{=}
3229 as the first character in the filename path. See also the
3230 description of @samp{-L} in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
3231
3232 If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
3233 name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command line argument
3234 @samp{-l}.
3235
3236 When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
3237 files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
3238 script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
3239
3240 @item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3241 @itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3242 @kindex GROUP(@var{files})
3243 @cindex grouping input files
3244 The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
3245 files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
3246 new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
3247 in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
3248
3249 @item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3250 @itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3251 @kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
3252 This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
3253 commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
3254 as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
3255 with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
3256 when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
3257 @option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
3258 and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
3259 setting afterwards.
3260
3261 @item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3262 @kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3263 @cindex output file name in linker script
3264 The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
3265 @code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
3266 @samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
3267 Line Options}). If both are used, the command line option takes
3268 precedence.
3269
3270 You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
3271 output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
3272
3273 @item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3274 @kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3275 @cindex library search path in linker script
3276 @cindex archive search path in linker script
3277 @cindex search path in linker script
3278 The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
3279 @command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
3280 @code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
3281 on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both
3282 are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
3283 the command line option are searched first.
3284
3285 @item STARTUP(@var{filename})
3286 @kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
3287 @cindex first input file
3288 The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
3289 that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
3290 though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
3291 when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
3292 first file.
3293 @end table
3294
3295 @ifclear SingleFormat
3296 @node Format Commands
3297 @subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
3298 A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
3299
3300 @table @code
3301 @item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3302 @itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
3303 @kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3304 @cindex output file format in linker script
3305 The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
3306 output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
3307 exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3308 (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both are used, the command
3309 line option takes precedence.
3310
3311 You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
3312 formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command line options.
3313 This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
3314 desired endianness.
3315
3316 If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
3317 will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
3318 output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
3319 used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
3320
3321 For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
3322 command:
3323 @smallexample
3324 OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
3325 @end smallexample
3326 This says that the default format for the output file is
3327 @samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command line
3328 option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
3329 format.
3330
3331 @item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3332 @kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3333 @cindex input file format in linker script
3334 The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
3335 files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
3336 This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3337 (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
3338 is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
3339 command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
3340 @end table
3341 @end ifclear
3342
3343 @node REGION_ALIAS
3344 @subsection Assign alias names to memory regions
3345 @kindex REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3346 @cindex region alias
3347 @cindex region names
3348
3349 Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
3350 @ref{MEMORY} command. Each name corresponds to at most one memory region.
3351
3352 @smallexample
3353 REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3354 @end smallexample
3355
3356 The @code{REGION_ALIAS} function creates an alias name @var{alias} for the
3357 memory region @var{region}. This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
3358 to memory regions. An example follows.
3359
3360 Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with various
3361 memory storage devices. All have a general purpose, volatile memory @code{RAM}
3362 that allows code execution or data storage. Some may have a read-only,
3363 non-volatile memory @code{ROM} that allows code execution and read-only data
3364 access. The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile memory @code{ROM2} with
3365 read-only data access and no code execution capability. We have four output
3366 sections:
3367
3368 @itemize @bullet
3369 @item
3370 @code{.text} program code;
3371 @item
3372 @code{.rodata} read-only data;
3373 @item
3374 @code{.data} read-write initialized data;
3375 @item
3376 @code{.bss} read-write zero initialized data.
3377 @end itemize
3378
3379 The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system independent
3380 part defining the output sections and a system dependent part mapping the
3381 output sections to the memory regions available on the system. Our embedded
3382 systems come with three different memory setups @code{A}, @code{B} and
3383 @code{C}:
3384 @multitable @columnfractions .25 .25 .25 .25
3385 @item Section @tab Variant A @tab Variant B @tab Variant C
3386 @item .text @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM
3387 @item .rodata @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM2
3388 @item .data @tab RAM @tab RAM/ROM @tab RAM/ROM2
3389 @item .bss @tab RAM @tab RAM @tab RAM
3390 @end multitable
3391 The notation @code{RAM/ROM} or @code{RAM/ROM2} means that this section is
3392 loaded into region @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} respectively. Please note that
3393 the load address of the @code{.data} section starts in all three variants at
3394 the end of the @code{.rodata} section.
3395
3396 The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows. It
3397 includes the system dependent @code{linkcmds.memory} file that describes the
3398 memory layout:
3399 @smallexample
3400 INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
3401
3402 SECTIONS
3403 @{
3404 .text :
3405 @{
3406 *(.text)
3407 @} > REGION_TEXT
3408 .rodata :
3409 @{
3410 *(.rodata)
3411 rodata_end = .;
3412 @} > REGION_RODATA
3413 .data : AT (rodata_end)
3414 @{
3415 data_start = .;
3416 *(.data)
3417 @} > REGION_DATA
3418 data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
3419 data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
3420 .bss :
3421 @{
3422 *(.bss)
3423 @} > REGION_BSS
3424 @}
3425 @end smallexample
3426
3427 Now we need three different @code{linkcmds.memory} files to define memory
3428 regions and alias names. The content of @code{linkcmds.memory} for the three
3429 variants @code{A}, @code{B} and @code{C}:
3430 @table @code
3431 @item A
3432 Here everything goes into the @code{RAM}.
3433 @smallexample
3434 MEMORY
3435 @{
3436 RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
3437 @}
3438
3439 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
3440 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
3441 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3442 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3443 @end smallexample
3444 @item B
3445 Program code and read-only data go into the @code{ROM}. Read-write data goes
3446 into the @code{RAM}. An image of the initialized data is loaded into the
3447 @code{ROM} and will be copied during system start into the @code{RAM}.
3448 @smallexample
3449 MEMORY
3450 @{
3451 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
3452 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3453 @}
3454
3455 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3456 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
3457 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3458 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3459 @end smallexample
3460 @item C
3461 Program code goes into the @code{ROM}. Read-only data goes into the
3462 @code{ROM2}. Read-write data goes into the @code{RAM}. An image of the
3463 initialized data is loaded into the @code{ROM2} and will be copied during
3464 system start into the @code{RAM}.
3465 @smallexample
3466 MEMORY
3467 @{
3468 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
3469 ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3470 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
3471 @}
3472
3473 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3474 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
3475 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3476 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3477 @end smallexample
3478 @end table
3479
3480 It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to copy the
3481 @code{.data} section from @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} into the @code{RAM} if
3482 necessary:
3483 @smallexample
3484 #include <string.h>
3485
3486 extern char data_start [];
3487 extern char data_size [];
3488 extern char data_load_start [];
3489
3490 void copy_data(void)
3491 @{
3492 if (data_start != data_load_start)
3493 @{
3494 memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
3495 @}
3496 @}
3497 @end smallexample
3498
3499 @node Miscellaneous Commands
3500 @subsection Other Linker Script Commands
3501 There are a few other linker scripts commands.
3502
3503 @table @code
3504 @item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
3505 @kindex ASSERT
3506 @cindex assertion in linker script
3507 Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
3508 with an error code, and print @var{message}.
3509
3510 Note that assertions are checked before the final stages of linking
3511 take place. This means that expressions involving symbols PROVIDEd
3512 inside section definitions will fail if the user has not set values
3513 for those symbols. The only exception to this rule is PROVIDEd
3514 symbols that just reference dot. Thus an assertion like this:
3515
3516 @smallexample
3517 .stack :
3518 @{
3519 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3520 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3521 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3522 @}
3523 @end smallexample
3524
3525 will fail if @code{__stack_size} is not defined elsewhere. Symbols
3526 PROVIDEd outside of section definitions are evaluated earlier, so they
3527 can be used inside ASSERTions. Thus:
3528
3529 @smallexample
3530 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3531 .stack :
3532 @{
3533 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3534 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3535 @}
3536 @end smallexample
3537
3538 will work.
3539
3540 @item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
3541 @kindex EXTERN
3542 @cindex undefined symbol in linker script
3543 Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
3544 symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
3545 modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
3546 each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
3547 command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
3548
3549 @item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3550 @kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3551 @cindex common allocation in linker script
3552 This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
3553 to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
3554 output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
3555
3556 @item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3557 @kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3558 @cindex common allocation in linker script
3559 This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
3560 command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
3561 to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
3562
3563 @item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
3564 @kindex INSERT
3565 @cindex insert user script into default script
3566 This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
3567 augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
3568 inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
3569 @var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
3570 default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
3571 sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
3572 linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
3573 insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
3574 linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
3575 default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
3576 of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
3577 to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
3578 is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
3579
3580 @smallexample
3581 SECTIONS
3582 @{
3583 OVERLAY :
3584 @{
3585 .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
3586 .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
3587 @}
3588 @}
3589 INSERT AFTER .text;
3590 @end smallexample
3591
3592 @item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
3593 @kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
3594 @cindex cross references
3595 This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
3596 references among certain output sections.
3597
3598 In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
3599 using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
3600 will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
3601 errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
3602 a function defined in the other section.
3603
3604 The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
3605 @command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
3606 an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
3607 @code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
3608 names.
3609
3610 @ifclear SingleFormat
3611 @item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3612 @kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3613 @cindex machine architecture
3614 @cindex architecture
3615 Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
3616 of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
3617 architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
3618 the @samp{-f} option.
3619 @end ifclear
3620
3621 @item LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3622 @kindex LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3623 This command may be used to modify @command{ld} behavior. If
3624 @var{string} is @code{"SANE_EXPR"} then absolute symbols and numbers
3625 in a script are simply treated as numbers everywhere.
3626 @xref{Expression Section}.
3627 @end table
3628
3629 @node Assignments
3630 @section Assigning Values to Symbols
3631 @cindex assignment in scripts
3632 @cindex symbol definition, scripts
3633 @cindex variables, defining
3634 You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
3635 the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
3636
3637 @menu
3638 * Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
3639 * HIDDEN:: HIDDEN
3640 * PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
3641 * PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3642 * Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
3643 @end menu
3644
3645 @node Simple Assignments
3646 @subsection Simple Assignments
3647
3648 You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
3649
3650 @table @code
3651 @item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
3652 @itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
3653 @itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
3654 @itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
3655 @itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
3656 @itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
3657 @itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
3658 @itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
3659 @itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
3660 @end table
3661
3662 The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
3663 @var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
3664 defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
3665
3666 The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
3667 may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
3668
3669 The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
3670
3671 Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
3672
3673 You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
3674 statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
3675 section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
3676
3677 The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
3678 expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
3679
3680 Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
3681 assignments may be used:
3682
3683 @smallexample
3684 floating_point = 0;
3685 SECTIONS
3686 @{
3687 .text :
3688 @{
3689 *(.text)
3690 _etext = .;
3691 @}
3692 _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
3693 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3694 @}
3695 @end smallexample
3696 @noindent
3697 In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
3698 zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
3699 the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
3700 defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
3701 upward to a 4 byte boundary.
3702
3703 @node HIDDEN
3704 @subsection HIDDEN
3705 @cindex HIDDEN
3706 For ELF targeted ports, define a symbol that will be hidden and won't be
3707 exported. The syntax is @code{HIDDEN(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3708
3709 Here is the example from @ref{Simple Assignments}, rewritten to use
3710 @code{HIDDEN}:
3711
3712 @smallexample
3713 HIDDEN(floating_point = 0);
3714 SECTIONS
3715 @{
3716 .text :
3717 @{
3718 *(.text)
3719 HIDDEN(_etext = .);
3720 @}
3721 HIDDEN(_bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3);
3722 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3723 @}
3724 @end smallexample
3725 @noindent
3726 In this case none of the three symbols will be visible outside this module.
3727
3728 @node PROVIDE
3729 @subsection PROVIDE
3730 @cindex PROVIDE
3731 In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
3732 only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
3733 the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
3734 @samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
3735 @samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
3736 @code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
3737 @samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
3738 @code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3739
3740 Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
3741 @smallexample
3742 SECTIONS
3743 @{
3744 .text :
3745 @{
3746 *(.text)
3747 _etext = .;
3748 PROVIDE(etext = .);
3749 @}
3750 @}
3751 @end smallexample
3752
3753 In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
3754 underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
3755 the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
3756 underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
3757 If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
3758 linker will use the definition in the linker script.
3759
3760 @node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3761 @subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3762 @cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3763 Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
3764 hidden and won't be exported.
3765
3766 @node Source Code Reference
3767 @subsection Source Code Reference
3768
3769 Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
3770 intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
3771 a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
3772 symbol that does not have a value.
3773
3774 Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
3775 transform names in the source code into different names when they are
3776 stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
3777 prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
3778 mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
3779 of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
3780 variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
3781 linker script variable might be referred to as:
3782
3783 @smallexample
3784 extern int foo;
3785 @end smallexample
3786
3787 But in the linker script it might be defined as:
3788
3789 @smallexample
3790 _foo = 1000;
3791 @end smallexample
3792
3793 In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
3794 transformation has taken place.
3795
3796 When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
3797 things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
3798 in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
3799 second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
3800 table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
3801 contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
3802 value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
3803
3804 @smallexample
3805 int foo = 1000;
3806 @end smallexample
3807
3808 creates an entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
3809 holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
3810 number 1000 is initially stored.
3811
3812 When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
3813 first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
3814 memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
3815 So:
3816
3817 @smallexample
3818 foo = 1;
3819 @end smallexample
3820
3821 looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
3822 associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
3823 address. Whereas:
3824
3825 @smallexample
3826 int * a = & foo;
3827 @end smallexample
3828
3829 looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets its address
3830 and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
3831 the variable @samp{a}.
3832
3833 Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
3834 the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
3835 an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
3836
3837 @smallexample
3838 foo = 1000;
3839 @end smallexample
3840
3841 creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
3842 the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
3843 address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
3844 linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
3845 access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
3846
3847 Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
3848 you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
3849 use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
3850 section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
3851 linker script contains these declarations:
3852
3853 @smallexample
3854 @group
3855 start_of_ROM = .ROM;
3856 end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM) - 1;
3857 start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
3858 @end group
3859 @end smallexample
3860
3861 Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
3862
3863 @smallexample
3864 @group
3865 extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
3866
3867 memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
3868 @end group
3869 @end smallexample
3870
3871 Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
3872
3873 @node SECTIONS
3874 @section SECTIONS Command
3875 @kindex SECTIONS
3876 The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
3877 into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
3878
3879 The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
3880 @smallexample
3881 SECTIONS
3882 @{
3883 @var{sections-command}
3884 @var{sections-command}
3885 @dots{}
3886 @}
3887 @end smallexample
3888
3889 Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
3890
3891 @itemize @bullet
3892 @item
3893 an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
3894 @item
3895 a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3896 @item
3897 an output section description
3898 @item
3899 an overlay description
3900 @end itemize
3901
3902 The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
3903 @code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
3904 those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
3905 understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
3906 the layout of the output file.
3907
3908 Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
3909 below.
3910
3911 If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
3912 linker will place each input section into an identically named output
3913 section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
3914 input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
3915 example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
3916 in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
3917
3918 @menu
3919 * Output Section Description:: Output section description
3920 * Output Section Name:: Output section name
3921 * Output Section Address:: Output section address
3922 * Input Section:: Input section description
3923 * Output Section Data:: Output section data
3924 * Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
3925 * Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
3926 * Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
3927 * Overlay Description:: Overlay description
3928 @end menu
3929
3930 @node Output Section Description
3931 @subsection Output Section Description
3932 The full description of an output section looks like this:
3933 @smallexample
3934 @group
3935 @var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
3936 [AT(@var{lma})]
3937 [ALIGN(@var{section_align}) | ALIGN_WITH_INPUT]
3938 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
3939 [@var{constraint}]
3940 @{
3941 @var{output-section-command}
3942 @var{output-section-command}
3943 @dots{}
3944 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}] [,]
3945 @end group
3946 @end smallexample
3947
3948 Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
3949
3950 The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
3951 name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
3952 The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fillexp} is used and
3953 the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
3954 The line breaks and other white space are optional.
3955
3956 Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
3957
3958 @itemize @bullet
3959 @item
3960 a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3961 @item
3962 an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
3963 @item
3964 data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
3965 @item
3966 a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
3967 @end itemize
3968
3969 @node Output Section Name
3970 @subsection Output Section Name
3971 @cindex name, section
3972 @cindex section name
3973 The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
3974 meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
3975 support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
3976 must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
3977 example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
3978 output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
3979 names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
3980 quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
3981 characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
3982 commas must be quoted.
3983
3984 The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
3985 Discarding}.
3986
3987 @node Output Section Address
3988 @subsection Output Section Address
3989 @cindex address, section
3990 @cindex section address
3991 The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
3992 address) of the output section. This address is optional, but if it
3993 is provided then the output address will be set exactly as specified.
3994
3995 If the output address is not specified then one will be chosen for the
3996 section, based on the heuristic below. This address will be adjusted
3997 to fit the alignment requirement of the output section. The
3998 alignment requirement is the strictest alignment of any input section
3999 contained within the output section.
4000
4001 The output section address heuristic is as follows:
4002
4003 @itemize @bullet
4004 @item
4005 If an output memory @var{region} is set for the section then it
4006 is added to this region and its address will be the next free address
4007 in that region.
4008
4009 @item
4010 If the MEMORY command has been used to create a list of memory
4011 regions then the first region which has attributes compatible with the
4012 section is selected to contain it. The section's output address will
4013 be the next free address in that region; @ref{MEMORY}.
4014
4015 @item
4016 If no memory regions were specified, or none match the section then
4017 the output address will be based on the current value of the location
4018 counter.
4019 @end itemize
4020
4021 @noindent
4022 For example:
4023
4024 @smallexample
4025 .text . : @{ *(.text) @}
4026 @end smallexample
4027
4028 @noindent
4029 and
4030
4031 @smallexample
4032 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4033 @end smallexample
4034
4035 @noindent
4036 are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
4037 @samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
4038 counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
4039 counter aligned to the strictest alignment of any of the @samp{.text}
4040 input sections.
4041
4042 The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
4043 For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
4044 so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
4045 do something like this:
4046 @smallexample
4047 .text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
4048 @end smallexample
4049 @noindent
4050 This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
4051 aligned upward to the specified value.
4052
4053 Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
4054 location counter, provided that the section is non-empty. (Empty
4055 sections are ignored).
4056
4057 @node Input Section
4058 @subsection Input Section Description
4059 @cindex input sections
4060 @cindex mapping input sections to output sections
4061 The most common output section command is an input section description.
4062
4063 The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
4064 You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
4065 in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
4066 map the input files into your memory layout.
4067
4068 @menu
4069 * Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
4070 * Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
4071 * Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
4072 * Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
4073 * Input Section Example:: Input section example
4074 @end menu
4075
4076 @node Input Section Basics
4077 @subsubsection Input Section Basics
4078 @cindex input section basics
4079 An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
4080 by a list of section names in parentheses.
4081
4082 The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
4083 describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
4084
4085 The most common input section description is to include all input
4086 sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
4087 include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
4088 @smallexample
4089 *(.text)
4090 @end smallexample
4091 @noindent
4092 Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
4093 of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
4094 match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
4095 example:
4096 @smallexample
4097 *(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
4098 @end smallexample
4099 will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o} and
4100 @file{otherfile.o} to be included.
4101
4102 There are two ways to include more than one section:
4103 @smallexample
4104 *(.text .rdata)
4105 *(.text) *(.rdata)
4106 @end smallexample
4107 @noindent
4108 The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
4109 @samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
4110 first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
4111 they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
4112 @samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
4113 @samp{.rdata} input sections.
4114
4115 You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
4116 You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
4117 needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
4118 @smallexample
4119 data.o(.data)
4120 @end smallexample
4121
4122 To refine the sections that are included based on the section flags
4123 of an input section, INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS may be used.
4124
4125 Here is a simple example for using Section header flags for ELF sections:
4126
4127 @smallexample
4128 @group
4129 SECTIONS @{
4130 .text : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (SHF_MERGE & SHF_STRINGS) *(.text) @}
4131 .text2 : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (!SHF_WRITE) *(.text) @}
4132 @}
4133 @end group
4134 @end smallexample
4135
4136 In this example, the output section @samp{.text} will be comprised of any
4137 input section matching the name *(.text) whose section header flags
4138 @code{SHF_MERGE} and @code{SHF_STRINGS} are set. The output section
4139 @samp{.text2} will be comprised of any input section matching the name *(.text)
4140 whose section header flag @code{SHF_WRITE} is clear.
4141
4142 You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
4143 matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file,
4144 with no whitespace around the colon.
4145
4146 @table @samp
4147 @item archive:file
4148 matches file within archive
4149 @item archive:
4150 matches the whole archive
4151 @item :file
4152 matches file but not one in an archive
4153 @end table
4154
4155 Either one or both of @samp{archive} and @samp{file} can contain shell
4156 wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
4157 single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so
4158 @samp{c:myfile.o} is a simple file specification, not @samp{myfile.o}
4159 within an archive called @samp{c}. @samp{archive:file} filespecs may
4160 also be used within an @code{EXCLUDE_FILE} list, but may not appear in
4161 other linker script contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file
4162 from an archive by using @samp{archive:file} in an @code{INPUT}
4163 command.
4164
4165 If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
4166 the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
4167 commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
4168 @smallexample
4169 data.o
4170 @end smallexample
4171
4172 When you use a file name which is not an @samp{archive:file} specifier
4173 and does not contain any wild card
4174 characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
4175 name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
4176 did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
4177 though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
4178 @code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
4179 the archive search path.
4180
4181 @node Input Section Wildcards
4182 @subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
4183 @cindex input section wildcards
4184 @cindex wildcard file name patterns
4185 @cindex file name wildcard patterns
4186 @cindex section name wildcard patterns
4187 In an input section description, either the file name or the section
4188 name or both may be wildcard patterns.
4189
4190 The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
4191 pattern for the file name.
4192
4193 The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
4194
4195 @table @samp
4196 @item *
4197 matches any number of characters
4198 @item ?
4199 matches any single character
4200 @item [@var{chars}]
4201 matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
4202 character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
4203 @samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
4204 @item \
4205 quotes the following character
4206 @end table
4207
4208 When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
4209 will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
4210 Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
4211 exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
4212 @samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
4213 a @samp{/} character.
4214
4215 File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
4216 specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
4217 does not search directories to expand wildcards.
4218
4219 If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
4220 appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
4221 will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
4222 sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
4223 @file{data.o} rule will not be used:
4224 @smallexample
4225 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4226 .data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
4227 @end smallexample
4228
4229 @cindex SORT_BY_NAME
4230 Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
4231 in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
4232 this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
4233 pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
4234 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
4235 into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
4236
4237 @cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
4238 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4239 difference is @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into
4240 descending order by alignment before placing them in the output file.
4241 Larger alignments are placed before smaller alignments in order to
4242 reduce the amount of padding necessary.
4243
4244 @cindex SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY
4245 @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4246 difference is @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} will sort sections into
4247 ascending order by numerical value of the GCC init_priority attribute
4248 encoded in the section name before placing them in the output file.
4249
4250 @cindex SORT
4251 @code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
4252
4253 When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
4254 can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
4255
4256 @enumerate
4257 @item
4258 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4259 It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if two
4260 sections have the same name.
4261 @item
4262 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4263 It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if two
4264 sections have the same alignment.
4265 @item
4266 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
4267 treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
4268 @item
4269 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
4270 is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
4271 @item
4272 All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
4273 @end enumerate
4274
4275 When both command line section sorting option and linker script
4276 section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
4277 takes precedence over the command line option.
4278
4279 If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
4280 command line option will make the section sorting command to be
4281 treated as nested sorting command.
4282
4283 @enumerate
4284 @item
4285 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
4286 @option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
4287 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4288 @item
4289 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
4290 @option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
4291 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4292 @end enumerate
4293
4294 If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
4295 command line option will be ignored.
4296
4297 @cindex SORT_NONE
4298 @code{SORT_NONE} disables section sorting by ignoring the command line
4299 section sorting option.
4300
4301 If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
4302 @samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
4303 precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
4304
4305 This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
4306 files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
4307 sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
4308 The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
4309 with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
4310 linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
4311 @smallexample
4312 @group
4313 SECTIONS @{
4314 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4315 .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
4316 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4317 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
4318 @}
4319 @end group
4320 @end smallexample
4321
4322 @node Input Section Common
4323 @subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
4324 @cindex common symbol placement
4325 @cindex uninitialized data placement
4326 A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
4327 file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
4328 linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
4329 named @samp{COMMON}.
4330
4331 You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
4332 other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
4333 particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
4334 input files are placed in another section.
4335
4336 In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
4337 @samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
4338 @smallexample
4339 .bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
4340 @end smallexample
4341
4342 @cindex scommon section
4343 @cindex small common symbols
4344 Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
4345 example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
4346 symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
4347 different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
4348 the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
4349 symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
4350 to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
4351 locations.
4352
4353 @cindex [COMMON]
4354 You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
4355 notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
4356 @samp{*(COMMON)}.
4357
4358 @node Input Section Keep
4359 @subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
4360 @cindex KEEP
4361 @cindex garbage collection
4362 When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
4363 it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
4364 This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
4365 with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
4366 @code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
4367
4368 @node Input Section Example
4369 @subsubsection Input Section Example
4370 The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
4371 to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
4372 start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
4373 @samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
4374 follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
4375 @samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
4376 @samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
4377 All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
4378 files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
4379
4380 @smallexample
4381 @group
4382 SECTIONS @{
4383 outputa 0x10000 :
4384 @{
4385 all.o
4386 foo.o (.input1)
4387 @}
4388 @end group
4389 @group
4390 outputb :
4391 @{
4392 foo.o (.input2)
4393 foo1.o (.input1)
4394 @}
4395 @end group
4396 @group
4397 outputc :
4398 @{
4399 *(.input1)
4400 *(.input2)
4401 @}
4402 @}
4403 @end group
4404 @end smallexample
4405
4406 @node Output Section Data
4407 @subsection Output Section Data
4408 @cindex data
4409 @cindex section data
4410 @cindex output section data
4411 @kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
4412 @kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
4413 @kindex LONG(@var{expression})
4414 @kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
4415 @kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
4416 You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
4417 @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
4418 an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
4419 parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
4420 value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
4421 counter.
4422
4423 The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
4424 store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
4425 bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
4426 stored.
4427
4428 For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
4429 of the symbol @samp{addr}:
4430 @smallexample
4431 BYTE(1)
4432 LONG(addr)
4433 @end smallexample
4434
4435 When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
4436 same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
4437 target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
4438 @code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
4439 @code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
4440
4441 If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
4442 which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
4443 When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
4444 true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
4445 endianness of the first input object file.
4446
4447 Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
4448 between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
4449 @smallexample
4450 SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4451 @end smallexample
4452 whereas this will work:
4453 @smallexample
4454 SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4455 @end smallexample
4456
4457 @kindex FILL(@var{expression})
4458 @cindex holes, filling
4459 @cindex unspecified memory
4460 You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
4461 current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
4462 otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
4463 gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
4464 with the value of the expression, repeated as
4465 necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
4466 point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
4467 than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
4468 different parts of an output section.
4469
4470 This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
4471 value @samp{0x90}:
4472 @smallexample
4473 FILL(0x90909090)
4474 @end smallexample
4475
4476 The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
4477 section attribute, but it only affects the
4478 part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
4479 entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
4480 precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
4481 expression.
4482
4483 @node Output Section Keywords
4484 @subsection Output Section Keywords
4485 There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
4486 commands.
4487
4488 @table @code
4489 @kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4490 @cindex input filename symbols
4491 @cindex filename symbols
4492 @item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4493 The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
4494 The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
4495 file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
4496 the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
4497
4498 This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
4499 normally used for any other object file format.
4500
4501 @kindex CONSTRUCTORS
4502 @cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
4503 @cindex constructors, arranging in link
4504 @item CONSTRUCTORS
4505 When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
4506 unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
4507 destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
4508 arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
4509 automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
4510 For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
4511 linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
4512 @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
4513 ignored for other object file formats.
4514
4515 The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
4516 constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
4517 Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
4518 the start and end of the global destructors. The
4519 first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
4520 of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
4521 compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
4522 formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
4523 @code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
4524 the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
4525 destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
4526 @code{exit}.
4527
4528 For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
4529 arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
4530 addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
4531 and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
4532 linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
4533 runtime code expects to see.
4534
4535 @smallexample
4536 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
4537 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4538 *(.ctors)
4539 LONG(0)
4540 __CTOR_END__ = .;
4541 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
4542 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4543 *(.dtors)
4544 LONG(0)
4545 __DTOR_END__ = .;
4546 @end smallexample
4547
4548 If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
4549 which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
4550 are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
4551 are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
4552 command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
4553 @code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
4554 @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
4555 @samp{*(.dtors)}.
4556
4557 Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
4558 and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
4559 need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
4560 scripts.
4561
4562 @end table
4563
4564 @node Output Section Discarding
4565 @subsection Output Section Discarding
4566 @cindex discarding sections
4567 @cindex sections, discarding
4568 @cindex removing sections
4569 The linker will not normally create output sections with no contents.
4570 This is for convenience when referring to input sections that may or
4571 may not be present in any of the input files. For example:
4572 @smallexample
4573 .foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
4574 @end smallexample
4575 @noindent
4576 will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
4577 @samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
4578 sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
4579 space in an output section will also create the output section. So
4580 too will assignments to dot even if the assignment does not create
4581 space, except for @samp{. = 0}, @samp{. = . + 0}, @samp{. = sym},
4582 @samp{. = . + sym} and @samp{. = ALIGN (. != 0, expr, 1)} when
4583 @samp{sym} is an absolute symbol of value 0 defined in the script.
4584 This allows you to force output of an empty section with @samp{. = .}.
4585
4586 The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
4587 on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
4588 symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
4589 the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
4590 section is discarded.
4591
4592 @cindex /DISCARD/
4593 The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
4594 input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
4595 section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
4596
4597 @node Output Section Attributes
4598 @subsection Output Section Attributes
4599 @cindex output section attributes
4600 We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
4601 like this:
4602
4603 @smallexample
4604 @group
4605 @var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
4606 [AT(@var{lma})]
4607 [ALIGN(@var{section_align})]
4608 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4609 [@var{constraint}]
4610 @{
4611 @var{output-section-command}
4612 @var{output-section-command}
4613 @dots{}
4614 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
4615 @end group
4616 @end smallexample
4617
4618 We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
4619 @var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
4620 remaining section attributes.
4621
4622 @menu
4623 * Output Section Type:: Output section type
4624 * Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
4625 * Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
4626 * Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
4627 * Output Section Constraint:: Output section constraint
4628 * Output Section Region:: Output section region
4629 * Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
4630 * Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
4631 @end menu
4632
4633 @node Output Section Type
4634 @subsubsection Output Section Type
4635 Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
4636 parentheses. The following types are defined:
4637
4638 @table @code
4639 @item NOLOAD
4640 The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
4641 loaded into memory when the program is run.
4642 @item DSECT
4643 @itemx COPY
4644 @itemx INFO
4645 @itemx OVERLAY
4646 These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
4647 rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
4648 marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
4649 section when the program is run.
4650 @end table
4651
4652 @kindex NOLOAD
4653 @cindex prevent unnecessary loading
4654 @cindex loading, preventing
4655 The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
4656 the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
4657 the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
4658 @samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
4659 need to be loaded when the program is run.
4660 @smallexample
4661 @group
4662 SECTIONS @{
4663 ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
4664 @dots{}
4665 @}
4666 @end group
4667 @end smallexample
4668
4669 @node Output Section LMA
4670 @subsubsection Output Section LMA
4671 @kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
4672 @kindex AT(@var{lma})
4673 @cindex load address
4674 @cindex section load address
4675 Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
4676 @ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The virtual address is specified by the
4677 @pxref{Output Section Address} described earlier. The load address is
4678 specified by the @code{AT} or @code{AT>} keywords. Specifying a load
4679 address is optional.
4680
4681 The @code{AT} keyword takes an expression as an argument. This
4682 specifies the exact load address of the section. The @code{AT>} keyword
4683 takes the name of a memory region as an argument. @xref{MEMORY}. The
4684 load address of the section is set to the next free address in the
4685 region, aligned to the section's alignment requirements.
4686
4687 If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
4688 section, the linker will use the following heuristic to determine the
4689 load address:
4690
4691 @itemize @bullet
4692 @item
4693 If the section has a specific VMA address, then this is used as
4694 the LMA address as well.
4695
4696 @item
4697 If the section is not allocatable then its LMA is set to its VMA.
4698
4699 @item
4700 Otherwise if a memory region can be found that is compatible
4701 with the current section, and this region contains at least one
4702 section, then the LMA is set so the difference between the
4703 VMA and LMA is the same as the difference between the VMA and LMA of
4704 the last section in the located region.
4705
4706 @item
4707 If no memory regions have been declared then a default region
4708 that covers the entire address space is used in the previous step.
4709
4710 @item
4711 If no suitable region could be found, or there was no previous
4712 section then the LMA is set equal to the VMA.
4713 @end itemize
4714
4715 @cindex ROM initialized data
4716 @cindex initialized data in ROM
4717 This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
4718 example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
4719 called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
4720 @samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
4721 even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
4722 uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
4723 defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
4724 counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
4725
4726 @smallexample
4727 @group
4728 SECTIONS
4729 @{
4730 .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
4731 .mdata 0x2000 :
4732 AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
4733 @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
4734 .bss 0x3000 :
4735 @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
4736 @}
4737 @end group
4738 @end smallexample
4739
4740 The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
4741 this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
4742 the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
4743 how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
4744 script.
4745
4746 @smallexample
4747 @group
4748 extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
4749 char *src = &_etext;
4750 char *dst = &_data;
4751
4752 /* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
4753 while (dst < &_edata)
4754 *dst++ = *src++;
4755
4756 /* Zero bss. */
4757 for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
4758 *dst = 0;
4759 @end group
4760 @end smallexample
4761
4762 @node Forced Output Alignment
4763 @subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
4764 @kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
4765 @cindex forcing output section alignment
4766 @cindex output section alignment
4767 You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN. As an
4768 alternative you can enforce that the difference between the VMA and LMA remains
4769 intact throughout this output section with the ALIGN_WITH_INPUT attribute.
4770
4771 @node Forced Input Alignment
4772 @subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
4773 @kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
4774 @cindex forcing input section alignment
4775 @cindex input section alignment
4776 You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
4777 SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
4778 sections, whether larger or smaller.
4779
4780 @node Output Section Constraint
4781 @subsubsection Output Section Constraint
4782 @kindex ONLY_IF_RO
4783 @kindex ONLY_IF_RW
4784 @cindex constraints on output sections
4785 You can specify that an output section should only be created if all
4786 of its input sections are read-only or all of its input sections are
4787 read-write by using the keyword @code{ONLY_IF_RO} and
4788 @code{ONLY_IF_RW} respectively.
4789
4790 @node Output Section Region
4791 @subsubsection Output Section Region
4792 @kindex >@var{region}
4793 @cindex section, assigning to memory region
4794 @cindex memory regions and sections
4795 You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
4796 using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
4797
4798 Here is a simple example:
4799 @smallexample
4800 @group
4801 MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
4802 SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
4803 @end group
4804 @end smallexample
4805
4806 @node Output Section Phdr
4807 @subsubsection Output Section Phdr
4808 @kindex :@var{phdr}
4809 @cindex section, assigning to program header
4810 @cindex program headers and sections
4811 You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
4812 using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
4813 one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
4814 assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
4815 @code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
4816 linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
4817
4818 Here is a simple example:
4819 @smallexample
4820 @group
4821 PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
4822 SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
4823 @end group
4824 @end smallexample
4825
4826 @node Output Section Fill
4827 @subsubsection Output Section Fill
4828 @kindex =@var{fillexp}
4829 @cindex section fill pattern
4830 @cindex fill pattern, entire section
4831 You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
4832 @samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
4833 (@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
4834 within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
4835 alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
4836 necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
4837 of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
4838 an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
4839 fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
4840 other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
4841 pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
4842 expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
4843
4844 You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
4845 output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
4846
4847 Here is a simple example:
4848 @smallexample
4849 @group
4850 SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
4851 @end group
4852 @end smallexample
4853
4854 @node Overlay Description
4855 @subsection Overlay Description
4856 @kindex OVERLAY
4857 @cindex overlays
4858 An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
4859 are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
4860 the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
4861 copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
4862 required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
4863 can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
4864 than another.
4865
4866 Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
4867 @code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
4868 output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
4869 command is as follows:
4870 @smallexample
4871 @group
4872 OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
4873 @{
4874 @var{secname1}
4875 @{
4876 @var{output-section-command}
4877 @var{output-section-command}
4878 @dots{}
4879 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4880 @var{secname2}
4881 @{
4882 @var{output-section-command}
4883 @var{output-section-command}
4884 @dots{}
4885 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4886 @dots{}
4887 @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}] [,]
4888 @end group
4889 @end smallexample
4890
4891 Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
4892 section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
4893 section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
4894 those within the general @code{SECTIONS} construct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
4895 except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
4896 sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
4897
4898 The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fill} is used and
4899 the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
4900
4901 The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
4902 addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
4903 memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
4904 whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
4905 and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
4906 and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
4907
4908 If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there are any
4909 references among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since
4910 the sections all run at the same address, it normally does not make
4911 sense for one section to refer directly to another.
4912 @xref{Miscellaneous Commands, NOCROSSREFS}.
4913
4914 For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
4915 provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
4916 defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
4917 @code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
4918 the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
4919 within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
4920 symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
4921
4922 At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
4923 the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
4924
4925 Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
4926 @code{SECTIONS} construct.
4927 @smallexample
4928 @group
4929 OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
4930 @{
4931 .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
4932 .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
4933 @}
4934 @end group
4935 @end smallexample
4936 @noindent
4937 This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
4938 address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
4939 @samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
4940 following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
4941 @code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
4942 @code{__load_stop_text1}.
4943
4944 C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
4945 like the following.
4946
4947 @smallexample
4948 @group
4949 extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
4950 memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
4951 &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
4952 @end group
4953 @end smallexample
4954
4955 Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
4956 everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
4957 example could have been written identically as follows.
4958
4959 @smallexample
4960 @group
4961 .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
4962 PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
4963 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
4964 .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
4965 PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
4966 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
4967 . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
4968 @end group
4969 @end smallexample
4970
4971 @node MEMORY
4972 @section MEMORY Command
4973 @kindex MEMORY
4974 @cindex memory regions
4975 @cindex regions of memory
4976 @cindex allocating memory
4977 @cindex discontinuous memory
4978 The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
4979 memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
4980
4981 The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
4982 memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
4983 may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
4984 can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
4985 set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
4986 regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
4987 around to fit into the available regions.
4988
4989 A linker script may contain many uses of the @code{MEMORY} command,
4990 however, all memory blocks defined are treated as if they were
4991 specified inside a single @code{MEMORY} command. The syntax for
4992 @code{MEMORY} is:
4993 @smallexample
4994 @group
4995 MEMORY
4996 @{
4997 @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
4998 @dots{}
4999 @}
5000 @end group
5001 @end smallexample
5002
5003 The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
5004 region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
5005 Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5006 with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
5007 must have a distinct name within the @code{MEMORY} command. However you can
5008 add later alias names to existing memory regions with the @ref{REGION_ALIAS}
5009 command.
5010
5011 @cindex memory region attributes
5012 The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
5013 whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
5014 not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
5015 @ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
5016 section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
5017 the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
5018 them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
5019
5020 The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
5021 @table @samp
5022 @item R
5023 Read-only section
5024 @item W
5025 Read/write section
5026 @item X
5027 Executable section
5028 @item A
5029 Allocatable section
5030 @item I
5031 Initialized section
5032 @item L
5033 Same as @samp{I}
5034 @item !
5035 Invert the sense of any of the attributes that follow
5036 @end table
5037
5038 If a unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
5039 @samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
5040 attribute reverses this test, so that an unmapped section will be placed
5041 in the memory region only if it does not match any of the listed
5042 attributes.
5043
5044 @kindex ORIGIN =
5045 @kindex o =
5046 @kindex org =
5047 The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
5048 the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
5049 cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
5050 abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
5051 @code{ORG}).
5052
5053 @kindex LENGTH =
5054 @kindex len =
5055 @kindex l =
5056 The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
5057 region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
5058 be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
5059 @code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
5060
5061 In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
5062 available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
5063 and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
5064 linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
5065 is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
5066 or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
5067 explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
5068 region.
5069
5070 @smallexample
5071 @group
5072 MEMORY
5073 @{
5074 rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
5075 ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
5076 @}
5077 @end group
5078 @end smallexample
5079
5080 Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
5081 specific output sections into that memory region by using the
5082 @samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
5083 a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
5084 output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
5085 was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
5086 the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
5087 output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
5088 region, the linker will issue an error message.
5089
5090 It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
5091 expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
5092 @code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
5093
5094 @smallexample
5095 @group
5096 _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
5097 @end group
5098 @end smallexample
5099
5100 @node PHDRS
5101 @section PHDRS Command
5102 @kindex PHDRS
5103 @cindex program headers
5104 @cindex ELF program headers
5105 @cindex program segments
5106 @cindex segments, ELF
5107 The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
5108 @dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
5109 loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
5110 program with the @samp{-p} option.
5111
5112 When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
5113 reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
5114 program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
5115 This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
5116 interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
5117
5118 The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
5119 in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
5120 precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
5121 the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
5122 not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
5123
5124 The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
5125 generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
5126 ignore @code{PHDRS}.
5127
5128 This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
5129 @code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
5130
5131 @smallexample
5132 @group
5133 PHDRS
5134 @{
5135 @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
5136 [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
5137 @}
5138 @end group
5139 @end smallexample
5140
5141 The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
5142 of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
5143 header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5144 with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
5145 must have a distinct name. The headers are processed in order and it
5146 is usual for them to map to sections in ascending load address order.
5147
5148 Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
5149 system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
5150 specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
5151 sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
5152 attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
5153 Section Phdr}.
5154
5155 It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
5156 merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
5157 repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
5158 contain the section.
5159
5160 If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
5161 then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
5162 not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
5163 convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
5164 placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
5165 default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
5166 segment at all.
5167
5168 @kindex FILEHDR
5169 @kindex PHDRS
5170 You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords after
5171 the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
5172 The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
5173 file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
5174 include the ELF program headers themselves. If applied to a loadable
5175 segment (@code{PT_LOAD}), all prior loadable segments must have one of
5176 these keywords.
5177
5178 The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
5179 value of the keyword.
5180
5181 @table @asis
5182 @item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
5183 Indicates an unused program header.
5184
5185 @item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
5186 Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
5187 the file.
5188
5189 @item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
5190 Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
5191
5192 @item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
5193 Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
5194 found.
5195
5196 @item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
5197 Indicates a segment holding note information.
5198
5199 @item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
5200 A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
5201 ABI.
5202
5203 @item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
5204 Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
5205
5206 @item @var{expression}
5207 An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
5208 be used for types not defined above.
5209 @end table
5210
5211 You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
5212 in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
5213 @code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
5214 Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
5215 output section attribute.
5216
5217 The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
5218 which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
5219 explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
5220 an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
5221 header.
5222
5223 Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
5224 headers used on a native ELF system.
5225
5226 @example
5227 @group
5228 PHDRS
5229 @{
5230 headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
5231 interp PT_INTERP ;
5232 text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
5233 data PT_LOAD ;
5234 dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
5235 @}
5236
5237 SECTIONS
5238 @{
5239 . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
5240 .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
5241 .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
5242 .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
5243 @dots{}
5244 . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
5245 .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
5246 .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
5247 @dots{}
5248 @}
5249 @end group
5250 @end example
5251
5252 @node VERSION
5253 @section VERSION Command
5254 @kindex VERSION @{script text@}
5255 @cindex symbol versions
5256 @cindex version script
5257 @cindex versions of symbols
5258 The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
5259 only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
5260 symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
5261 a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
5262 shared library.
5263
5264 You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
5265 you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
5266 also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
5267
5268 The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
5269 @smallexample
5270 VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
5271 @end smallexample
5272
5273 The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
5274 Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
5275 version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
5276 version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
5277 version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
5278 scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
5279 library.
5280
5281 The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
5282 examples.
5283
5284 @smallexample
5285 VERS_1.1 @{
5286 global:
5287 foo1;
5288 local:
5289 old*;
5290 original*;
5291 new*;
5292 @};
5293
5294 VERS_1.2 @{
5295 foo2;
5296 @} VERS_1.1;
5297
5298 VERS_2.0 @{
5299 bar1; bar2;
5300 extern "C++" @{
5301 ns::*;
5302 "f(int, double)";
5303 @};
5304 @} VERS_1.2;
5305 @end smallexample
5306
5307 This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
5308 version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
5309 The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
5310 a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
5311 of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
5312 symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
5313 is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
5314 in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
5315 However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
5316 name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
5317
5318 Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
5319 depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
5320 to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
5321
5322 Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
5323 depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
5324 and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
5325
5326 When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
5327 specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
5328 unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
5329 unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
5330 somewhere in the version script. Note that it's slightly crazy to use
5331 wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node. Global
5332 wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
5333 set exported for an old version. That's wrong since older versions
5334 ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
5335
5336 The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
5337 they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
5338 could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
5339 However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
5340
5341 Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
5342 in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
5343 symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
5344 won't.
5345
5346 @smallexample
5347 @{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
5348 @end smallexample
5349
5350 When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
5351 symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
5352 requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
5353 shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
5354 loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
5355 linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
5356 application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
5357 way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
5358 all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
5359 search for each symbol reference.
5360
5361 The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
5362 doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
5363 that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
5364 functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
5365 the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
5366 required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
5367 that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
5368 versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
5369 the libraries being used with the application are too old.
5370
5371 There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
5372 first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
5373 source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
5374 script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
5375 maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
5376 @smallexample
5377 __asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5378 @end smallexample
5379 @noindent
5380 in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
5381 be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
5382 The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
5383 @samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
5384 takes precedence over a version script.
5385
5386 The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
5387 function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
5388 an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
5389 version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
5390 linked against the old interface to continue to function.
5391
5392 To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
5393 source file. Here is an example:
5394
5395 @smallexample
5396 __asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
5397 __asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5398 __asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
5399 __asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
5400 @end smallexample
5401
5402 In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
5403 unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
5404 example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
5405 @samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
5406
5407 When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
5408 some way to specify a default version to which external references to
5409 this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
5410 @samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
5411 declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
5412 you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
5413
5414 If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
5415 within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
5416 (i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
5417 specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
5418
5419 You can also specify the language in the version script:
5420
5421 @smallexample
5422 VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
5423 @end smallexample
5424
5425 The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
5426 The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
5427 demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
5428 patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}. The default
5429 @samp{lang} is @samp{C}.
5430
5431 Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
5432 described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
5433 or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
5434 the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
5435 whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
5436 cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
5437 might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
5438 should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
5439 expect when you upgrade.
5440
5441 @node Expressions
5442 @section Expressions in Linker Scripts
5443 @cindex expressions
5444 @cindex arithmetic
5445 The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
5446 that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
5447 expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
5448 host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
5449
5450 You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
5451
5452 The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
5453 expressions.
5454
5455 @menu
5456 * Constants:: Constants
5457 * Symbolic Constants:: Symbolic constants
5458 * Symbols:: Symbol Names
5459 * Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
5460 * Location Counter:: The Location Counter
5461 * Operators:: Operators
5462 * Evaluation:: Evaluation
5463 * Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
5464 * Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
5465 @end menu
5466
5467 @node Constants
5468 @subsection Constants
5469 @cindex integer notation
5470 @cindex constants in linker scripts
5471 All constants are integers.
5472
5473 As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
5474 octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
5475 hexadecimal. Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of @samp{h} or
5476 @samp{H} for hexadecimal, @samp{o} or @samp{O} for octal, @samp{b} or
5477 @samp{B} for binary and @samp{d} or @samp{D} for decimal. Any integer
5478 value without a prefix or a suffix is considered to be decimal.
5479
5480 @cindex scaled integers
5481 @cindex K and M integer suffixes
5482 @cindex M and K integer suffixes
5483 @cindex suffixes for integers
5484 @cindex integer suffixes
5485 In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
5486 constant by
5487 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5488 @ifnottex
5489 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5490 @code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
5491 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5492 @end ifnottex
5493 @tex
5494 ${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
5495 @end tex
5496 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5497 respectively. For example, the following
5498 all refer to the same quantity:
5499
5500 @smallexample
5501 _fourk_1 = 4K;
5502 _fourk_2 = 4096;
5503 _fourk_3 = 0x1000;
5504 _fourk_4 = 10000o;
5505 @end smallexample
5506
5507 Note - the @code{K} and @code{M} suffixes cannot be used in
5508 conjunction with the base suffixes mentioned above.
5509
5510 @node Symbolic Constants
5511 @subsection Symbolic Constants
5512 @cindex symbolic constants
5513 @kindex CONSTANT
5514 It is possible to refer to target specific constants via the use of
5515 the @code{CONSTANT(@var{name})} operator, where @var{name} is one of:
5516
5517 @table @code
5518 @item MAXPAGESIZE
5519 @kindex MAXPAGESIZE
5520 The target's maximum page size.
5521
5522 @item COMMONPAGESIZE
5523 @kindex COMMONPAGESIZE
5524 The target's default page size.
5525 @end table
5526
5527 So for example:
5528
5529 @smallexample
5530 .text ALIGN (CONSTANT (MAXPAGESIZE)) : @{ *(.text) @}
5531 @end smallexample
5532
5533 will create a text section aligned to the largest page boundary
5534 supported by the target.
5535
5536 @node Symbols
5537 @subsection Symbol Names
5538 @cindex symbol names
5539 @cindex names
5540 @cindex quoted symbol names
5541 @kindex "
5542 Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
5543 and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
5544 Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
5545 specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
5546 keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
5547 @smallexample
5548 "SECTION" = 9;
5549 "with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
5550 @end smallexample
5551
5552 Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
5553 to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
5554 whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
5555
5556 @node Orphan Sections
5557 @subsection Orphan Sections
5558 @cindex orphan
5559 Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
5560 are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
5561 script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
5562 output file, but it has to guess as to where they should be
5563 placed. The linker uses a simple heuristic to do this. It
5564 attempts to place orphan sections after non-orphan sections of the
5565 same attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc.
5566 If there is not enough room to do this then it places
5567 at the end of the file.
5568
5569 For ELF targets, the attribute of the section includes section type as
5570 well as section flag.
5571
5572 If an orphaned section's name is representable as a C identifier then
5573 the linker will automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols:
5574 __start_SECNAME and __stop_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the
5575 section. These indicate the start address and end address of the
5576 orphaned section respectively. Note: most section names are not
5577 representable as C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.}
5578 character.
5579
5580 @node Location Counter
5581 @subsection The Location Counter
5582 @kindex .
5583 @cindex dot
5584 @cindex location counter
5585 @cindex current output location
5586 The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
5587 current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
5588 location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
5589 within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
5590 anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
5591
5592 @cindex holes
5593 Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
5594 moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
5595 location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
5596 and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
5597 doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
5598
5599 @smallexample
5600 SECTIONS
5601 @{
5602 output :
5603 @{
5604 file1(.text)
5605 . = . + 1000;
5606 file2(.text)
5607 . += 1000;
5608 file3(.text)
5609 @} = 0x12345678;
5610 @}
5611 @end smallexample
5612 @noindent
5613 In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
5614 located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
5615 followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
5616 @file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
5617 @samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
5618 specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
5619
5620 @cindex dot inside sections
5621 Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
5622 current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
5623 statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
5624 absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
5625 however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
5626 not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
5627
5628 @smallexample
5629 SECTIONS
5630 @{
5631 . = 0x100
5632 .text: @{
5633 *(.text)
5634 . = 0x200
5635 @}
5636 . = 0x500
5637 .data: @{
5638 *(.data)
5639 . += 0x600
5640 @}
5641 @}
5642 @end smallexample
5643
5644 The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
5645 and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
5646 the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
5647 much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
5648 move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
5649 and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
5650 the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
5651 the @samp{.data} output section itself.
5652
5653 @cindex dot outside sections
5654 Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
5655 output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
5656 needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
5657
5658 @smallexample
5659 SECTIONS
5660 @{
5661 start_of_text = . ;
5662 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5663 end_of_text = . ;
5664
5665 start_of_data = . ;
5666 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5667 end_of_data = . ;
5668 @}
5669 @end smallexample
5670
5671 If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
5672 not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
5673 between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
5674 should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
5675 blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
5676 the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
5677 sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
5678 statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
5679 special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
5680 place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
5681 as follows:
5682
5683 @smallexample
5684 SECTIONS
5685 @{
5686 start_of_text = . ;
5687 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5688 end_of_text = . ;
5689
5690 start_of_data = . ;
5691 .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
5692 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5693 end_of_data = . ;
5694 @}
5695 @end smallexample
5696
5697 This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
5698 @code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
5699 placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
5700 assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
5701 a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
5702 section. So you could write:
5703
5704 @smallexample
5705 SECTIONS
5706 @{
5707 start_of_text = . ;
5708 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5709 end_of_text = . ;
5710
5711 . = . ;
5712 start_of_data = . ;
5713 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5714 end_of_data = . ;
5715 @}
5716 @end smallexample
5717
5718 Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
5719 @code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
5720
5721 @need 2000
5722 @node Operators
5723 @subsection Operators
5724 @cindex operators for arithmetic
5725 @cindex arithmetic operators
5726 @cindex precedence in expressions
5727 The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
5728 the standard bindings and precedence levels:
5729 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5730 @ifnottex
5731 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5732 @smallexample
5733 precedence associativity Operators Notes
5734 (highest)
5735 1 left ! - ~ (1)
5736 2 left * / %
5737 3 left + -
5738 4 left >> <<
5739 5 left == != > < <= >=
5740 6 left &
5741 7 left |
5742 8 left &&
5743 9 left ||
5744 10 right ? :
5745 11 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
5746 (lowest)
5747 @end smallexample
5748 Notes:
5749 (1) Prefix operators
5750 (2) @xref{Assignments}.
5751 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5752 @end ifnottex
5753 @tex
5754 \vskip \baselineskip
5755 %"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
5756 \hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
5757 \hrule
5758 \halign
5759 {\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
5760 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5761 &Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
5762 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5763 \noalign{\hrule}
5764 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5765 &highest&&&&&\cr
5766 % '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
5767 &1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
5768 &2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
5769 &3&&left&&+ -&\cr
5770 &4&&left&&>> <<&\cr
5771 &5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
5772 &6&&left&&\&&\cr
5773 &7&&left&&|&\cr
5774 &8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
5775 &9&&left&&||&\cr
5776 &10&&right&&? :&\cr
5777 &11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
5778 &lowest&&&&&\cr
5779 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
5780 \hrule}
5781 @end tex
5782 @iftex
5783 {
5784 @obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
5785 @dag@quad Prefix operators.
5786 @ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
5787 }
5788 @end iftex
5789 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5790
5791 @node Evaluation
5792 @subsection Evaluation
5793 @cindex lazy evaluation
5794 @cindex expression evaluation order
5795 The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
5796 an expression when absolutely necessary.
5797
5798 The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
5799 address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
5800 regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
5801 as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
5802
5803 However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
5804 until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
5805 other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
5806 for use in the symbol assignment expression.
5807
5808 The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
5809 assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
5810 allocation.
5811
5812 Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
5813 @samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
5814
5815 If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
5816 available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
5817 following
5818 @smallexample
5819 @group
5820 SECTIONS
5821 @{
5822 .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
5823 @{ *(.text) @}
5824 @}
5825 @end group
5826 @end smallexample
5827 @noindent
5828 will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
5829 address}.
5830
5831 @node Expression Section
5832 @subsection The Section of an Expression
5833 @cindex expression sections
5834 @cindex absolute expressions
5835 @cindex relative expressions
5836 @cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
5837 @cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
5838 @cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
5839 Addresses and symbols may be section relative, or absolute. A section
5840 relative symbol is relocatable. If you request relocatable output
5841 using the @samp{-r} option, a further link operation may change the
5842 value of a section relative symbol. On the other hand, an absolute
5843 symbol will retain the same value throughout any further link
5844 operations.
5845
5846 Some terms in linker expressions are addresses. This is true of
5847 section relative symbols and for builtin functions that return an
5848 address, such as @code{ADDR}, @code{LOADADDR}, @code{ORIGIN} and
5849 @code{SEGMENT_START}. Other terms are simply numbers, or are builtin
5850 functions that return a non-address value, such as @code{LENGTH}.
5851 One complication is that unless you set @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")}
5852 (@pxref{Miscellaneous Commands}), numbers and absolute symbols are treated
5853 differently depending on their location, for compatibility with older
5854 versions of @code{ld}. Expressions appearing outside an output
5855 section definition treat all numbers as absolute addresses.
5856 Expressions appearing inside an output section definition treat
5857 absolute symbols as numbers. If @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} is
5858 given, then absolute symbols and numbers are simply treated as numbers
5859 everywhere.
5860
5861 In the following simple example,
5862
5863 @smallexample
5864 @group
5865 SECTIONS
5866 @{
5867 . = 0x100;
5868 __executable_start = 0x100;
5869 .data :
5870 @{
5871 . = 0x10;
5872 __data_start = 0x10;
5873 *(.data)
5874 @}
5875 @dots{}
5876 @}
5877 @end group
5878 @end smallexample
5879
5880 both @code{.} and @code{__executable_start} are set to the absolute
5881 address 0x100 in the first two assignments, then both @code{.} and
5882 @code{__data_start} are set to 0x10 relative to the @code{.data}
5883 section in the second two assignments.
5884
5885 For expressions involving numbers, relative addresses and absolute
5886 addresses, ld follows these rules to evaluate terms:
5887
5888 @itemize @bullet
5889 @item
5890 Unary operations on an absolute address or number, and binary
5891 operations on two absolute addresses or two numbers, or between one
5892 absolute address and a number, apply the operator to the value(s).
5893 @item
5894 Unary operations on a relative address, and binary operations on two
5895 relative addresses in the same section or between one relative address
5896 and a number, apply the operator to the offset part of the address(es).
5897 @item
5898 Other binary operations, that is, between two relative addresses not
5899 in the same section, or between a relative address and an absolute
5900 address, first convert any non-absolute term to an absolute address
5901 before applying the operator.
5902 @end itemize
5903
5904 The result section of each sub-expression is as follows:
5905
5906 @itemize @bullet
5907 @item
5908 An operation involving only numbers results in a number.
5909 @item
5910 The result of comparisons, @samp{&&} and @samp{||} is also a number.
5911 @item
5912 The result of other binary arithmetic and logical operations on two
5913 relative addresses in the same section or two absolute addresses
5914 (after above conversions) is also a number.
5915 @item
5916 The result of other operations on relative addresses or one
5917 relative address and a number, is a relative address in the same
5918 section as the relative operand(s).
5919 @item
5920 The result of other operations on absolute addresses (after above
5921 conversions) is an absolute address.
5922 @end itemize
5923
5924 You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
5925 to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
5926 create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
5927 section @samp{.data}:
5928 @smallexample
5929 SECTIONS
5930 @{
5931 .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
5932 @}
5933 @end smallexample
5934 @noindent
5935 If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
5936 @samp{.data} section.
5937
5938 Using @code{LOADADDR} also forces an expression absolute, since this
5939 particular builtin function returns an absolute address.
5940
5941 @node Builtin Functions
5942 @subsection Builtin Functions
5943 @cindex functions in expressions
5944 The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
5945 use in linker script expressions.
5946
5947 @table @code
5948 @item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5949 @kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5950 @cindex expression, absolute
5951 Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
5952 of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
5953 value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
5954 normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
5955
5956 @item ADDR(@var{section})
5957 @kindex ADDR(@var{section})
5958 @cindex section address in expression
5959 Return the address (VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
5960 script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
5961 the following example, @code{start_of_output_1}, @code{symbol_1} and
5962 @code{symbol_2} are assigned equivalent values, except that
5963 @code{symbol_1} will be relative to the @code{.output1} section while
5964 the other two will be absolute:
5965 @smallexample
5966 @group
5967 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5968 .output1 :
5969 @{
5970 start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
5971 @dots{}
5972 @}
5973 .output :
5974 @{
5975 symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
5976 symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
5977 @}
5978 @dots{} @}
5979 @end group
5980 @end smallexample
5981
5982 @item ALIGN(@var{align})
5983 @itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
5984 @kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
5985 @kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
5986 @cindex round up location counter
5987 @cindex align location counter
5988 @cindex round up expression
5989 @cindex align expression
5990 Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
5991 to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
5992 doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
5993 arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
5994 expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
5995 equivalent to @code{ALIGN(., @var{align})}).
5996
5997 Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
5998 next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
5999 variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
6000 input sections:
6001 @smallexample
6002 @group
6003 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6004 .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
6005 *(.data)
6006 variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
6007 @}
6008 @dots{} @}
6009 @end group
6010 @end smallexample
6011 @noindent
6012 The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
6013 a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
6014 a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
6015 of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
6016
6017 The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
6018
6019 @item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6020 @kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6021 @cindex section alignment
6022 Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6023 been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6024 evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6025 the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
6026 value in that section.
6027 @smallexample
6028 @group
6029 SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6030 .output @{
6031 LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
6032 @dots{}
6033 @}
6034 @dots{} @}
6035 @end group
6036 @end smallexample
6037
6038 @item BLOCK(@var{exp})
6039 @kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
6040 This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
6041 scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
6042 section.
6043
6044 @item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6045 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6046 This is equivalent to either
6047 @smallexample
6048 (ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
6049 @end smallexample
6050 or
6051 @smallexample
6052 (ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
6053 @end smallexample
6054 @noindent
6055 depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
6056 for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
6057 @code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
6058 If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
6059 memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
6060 bytes in the on-disk file.
6061
6062 This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
6063 any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
6064 @var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
6065 be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for (while still
6066 working on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}).
6067
6068 @noindent
6069 Example:
6070 @smallexample
6071 . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
6072 @end smallexample
6073
6074 @item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6075 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6076 This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
6077 evaluation purposes.
6078
6079 @smallexample
6080 . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
6081 @end smallexample
6082
6083 @item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6084 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6085 This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
6086 @samp{-z relro} option is used.
6087 When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
6088 does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
6089 @var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the most commonly used page
6090 boundary for particular target. If present in the linker script,
6091 it must always come in between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
6092 @code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}. Evaluates to the second argument plus any
6093 padding needed at the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment due to
6094 section alignment.
6095
6096 @smallexample
6097 . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
6098 @end smallexample
6099
6100 @item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6101 @kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6102 @cindex symbol defaults
6103 Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
6104 defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
6105 return 0. You can use this function to provide
6106 default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
6107 shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
6108 the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
6109 existed, its value is preserved:
6110
6111 @smallexample
6112 @group
6113 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6114 .text : @{
6115 begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
6116 @dots{}
6117 @}
6118 @dots{}
6119 @}
6120 @end group
6121 @end smallexample
6122
6123 @item LENGTH(@var{memory})
6124 @kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
6125 Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6126
6127 @item LOADADDR(@var{section})
6128 @kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
6129 @cindex section load address in expression
6130 Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. (@pxref{Output
6131 Section LMA}).
6132
6133 @item LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6134 @kindex LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6135 Return the binary logarithm of @var{exp} rounded towards infinity.
6136 @code{LOG2CEIL(0)} returns 0.
6137
6138 @kindex MAX
6139 @item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6140 Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6141
6142 @kindex MIN
6143 @item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6144 Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6145
6146 @item NEXT(@var{exp})
6147 @kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
6148 @cindex unallocated address, next
6149 Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
6150 This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
6151 use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
6152 output file, the two functions are equivalent.
6153
6154 @item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6155 @kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6156 Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6157
6158 @item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6159 @kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6160 Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
6161 value has already been given for this segment (with a command-line
6162 @samp{-T} option) then that value will be returned otherwise the value
6163 will be @var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option
6164 can only be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
6165 ``bss'' sections, but you can use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
6166 name.
6167
6168 @item SIZEOF(@var{section})
6169 @kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
6170 @cindex section size
6171 Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6172 been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6173 evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6174 @code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
6175 @smallexample
6176 @group
6177 SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6178 .output @{
6179 .start = . ;
6180 @dots{}
6181 .end = . ;
6182 @}
6183 symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
6184 symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
6185 @dots{} @}
6186 @end group
6187 @end smallexample
6188
6189 @item SIZEOF_HEADERS
6190 @itemx sizeof_headers
6191 @kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
6192 @cindex header size
6193 Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
6194 information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
6195 this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
6196 choose, to facilitate paging.
6197
6198 @cindex not enough room for program headers
6199 @cindex program headers, not enough room
6200 When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
6201 @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
6202 number of program headers before it has determined all the section
6203 addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
6204 additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
6205 room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
6206 the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
6207 script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
6208 you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
6209 command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
6210 @end table
6211
6212 @node Implicit Linker Scripts
6213 @section Implicit Linker Scripts
6214 @cindex implicit linker scripts
6215 If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
6216 an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
6217 linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
6218 linker will report an error.
6219
6220 An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
6221
6222 Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
6223 assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
6224 commands.
6225
6226 Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
6227 at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
6228 read. This can affect archive searching.
6229
6230 @ifset GENERIC
6231 @node Machine Dependent
6232 @chapter Machine Dependent Features
6233
6234 @cindex machine dependencies
6235 @command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
6236 sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
6237 functionality are not listed.
6238
6239 @menu
6240 @ifset H8300
6241 * H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
6242 @end ifset
6243 @ifset I960
6244 * i960:: @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family
6245 @end ifset
6246 @ifset M68HC11
6247 * M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6248 @end ifset
6249 @ifset ARM
6250 * ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
6251 @end ifset
6252 @ifset HPPA
6253 * HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
6254 @end ifset
6255 @ifset M68K
6256 * M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6257 @end ifset
6258 @ifset MIPS
6259 * MIPS:: @command{ld} and the MIPS family
6260 @end ifset
6261 @ifset MMIX
6262 * MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
6263 @end ifset
6264 @ifset MSP430
6265 * MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
6266 @end ifset
6267 @ifset NDS32
6268 * NDS32:: @command{ld} and NDS32
6269 @end ifset
6270 @ifset NIOSII
6271 * Nios II:: @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
6272 @end ifset
6273 @ifset POWERPC
6274 * PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6275 @end ifset
6276 @ifset POWERPC64
6277 * PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6278 @end ifset
6279 @ifset SPU
6280 * SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6281 @end ifset
6282 @ifset TICOFF
6283 * TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
6284 @end ifset
6285 @ifset WIN32
6286 * WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6287 @end ifset
6288 @ifset XTENSA
6289 * Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
6290 @end ifset
6291 @end menu
6292 @end ifset
6293
6294 @ifset H8300
6295 @ifclear GENERIC
6296 @raisesections
6297 @end ifclear
6298
6299 @node H8/300
6300 @section @command{ld} and the H8/300
6301
6302 @cindex H8/300 support
6303 For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
6304 you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6305
6306 @table @emph
6307 @cindex relaxing on H8/300
6308 @item relaxing address modes
6309 @command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6310 targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6311 program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6312 respectively.
6313
6314 @cindex synthesizing on H8/300
6315 @item synthesizing instructions
6316 @c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really? -> mov.b only, at least on H8, H8H, H8S
6317 @command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
6318 sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6319 page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
6320 (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
6321 @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
6322 top page of memory).
6323
6324 @command{ld} finds all @code{mov} instructions which use the register
6325 indirect with 32-bit displacement addressing mode, but use a small
6326 displacement inside 16-bit displacement range, and changes them to use
6327 the 16-bit displacement form. (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b
6328 @code{@@}@var{d}:32,ERx} into @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{d}:16,ERx}
6329 whenever the displacement @var{d} is in the 16 bit signed integer
6330 range. Only implemented in ELF-format ld).
6331
6332 @item bit manipulation instructions
6333 @command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
6334 biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
6335 which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6336 page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
6337 (That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
6338 @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
6339 the top page of memory).
6340
6341 @item system control instructions
6342 @command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
6343 32 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
6344 changes them to use 16 bit address form.
6345 (That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
6346 @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
6347 the top page of memory).
6348 @end table
6349
6350 @ifclear GENERIC
6351 @lowersections
6352 @end ifclear
6353 @end ifset
6354
6355 @ifclear GENERIC
6356 @ifset Renesas
6357 @c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
6358 @c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
6359 @node Renesas
6360 @chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
6361
6362 @command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
6363 H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
6364 options are required for these chips.
6365 @end ifset
6366 @end ifclear
6367
6368 @ifset I960
6369 @ifclear GENERIC
6370 @raisesections
6371 @end ifclear
6372
6373 @node i960
6374 @section @command{ld} and the Intel 960 Family
6375
6376 @cindex i960 support
6377
6378 You can use the @samp{-A@var{architecture}} command line option to
6379 specify one of the two-letter names identifying members of the 960
6380 family; the option specifies the desired output target, and warns of any
6381 incompatible instructions in the input files. It also modifies the
6382 linker's search strategy for archive libraries, to support the use of
6383 libraries specific to each particular architecture, by including in the
6384 search loop names suffixed with the string identifying the architecture.
6385
6386 For example, if your @command{ld} command line included @w{@samp{-ACA}} as
6387 well as @w{@samp{-ltry}}, the linker would look (in its built-in search
6388 paths, and in any paths you specify with @samp{-L}) for a library with
6389 the names
6390
6391 @smallexample
6392 @group
6393 try
6394 libtry.a
6395 tryca
6396 libtryca.a
6397 @end group
6398 @end smallexample
6399
6400 @noindent
6401 The first two possibilities would be considered in any event; the last
6402 two are due to the use of @w{@samp{-ACA}}.
6403
6404 You can meaningfully use @samp{-A} more than once on a command line, since
6405 the 960 architecture family allows combination of target architectures; each
6406 use will add another pair of name variants to search for when @w{@samp{-l}}
6407 specifies a library.
6408
6409 @cindex @option{--relax} on i960
6410 @cindex relaxing on i960
6411 @command{ld} supports the @samp{--relax} option for the i960 family. If
6412 you specify @samp{--relax}, @command{ld} finds all @code{balx} and
6413 @code{calx} instructions whose targets are within 24 bits, and turns
6414 them into 24-bit program-counter relative @code{bal} and @code{cal}
6415 instructions, respectively. @command{ld} also turns @code{cal}
6416 instructions into @code{bal} instructions when it determines that the
6417 target subroutine is a leaf routine (that is, the target subroutine does
6418 not itself call any subroutines).
6419
6420 @ifclear GENERIC
6421 @lowersections
6422 @end ifclear
6423 @end ifset
6424
6425 @ifset ARM
6426 @ifclear GENERIC
6427 @raisesections
6428 @end ifclear
6429
6430 @ifset M68HC11
6431 @ifclear GENERIC
6432 @raisesections
6433 @end ifclear
6434
6435 @node M68HC11/68HC12
6436 @section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6437
6438 @cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
6439
6440 @subsection Linker Relaxation
6441
6442 For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
6443 optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6444
6445 @table @emph
6446 @cindex relaxing on M68HC11
6447 @item relaxing address modes
6448 @command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6449 targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6450 program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6451 respectively.
6452
6453 @command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
6454 transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
6455 page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
6456
6457 @item relaxing gcc instruction group
6458 When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
6459 of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
6460 addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
6461 @code{bset} instructions.
6462
6463 @end table
6464
6465 @subsection Trampoline Generation
6466
6467 @cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
6468 @cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
6469 For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
6470 call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
6471 will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
6472 trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
6473 case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
6474 point to the function trampoline.
6475
6476 @ifclear GENERIC
6477 @lowersections
6478 @end ifclear
6479 @end ifset
6480
6481 @node ARM
6482 @section @command{ld} and the ARM family
6483
6484 @cindex ARM interworking support
6485 @kindex --support-old-code
6486 For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
6487 between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
6488 been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
6489 line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
6490 libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
6491 option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command line switch should be
6492 given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
6493 which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
6494 the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
6495 non-interworking aware Thumb code.
6496
6497 @cindex thumb entry point
6498 @cindex entry point, thumb
6499 @kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
6500 The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
6501 @samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
6502 But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
6503 branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
6504 executing in Thumb mode straight away.
6505
6506 @cindex PE import table prefixing
6507 @kindex --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables
6508 The @samp{--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables} switch is specifying, that
6509 the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
6510 element prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
6511 import tables. By default this option is turned off.
6512
6513 @cindex BE8
6514 @kindex --be8
6515 The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
6516 executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian
6517 objects - ie ones which have been assembled with the @option{-EB}
6518 option. The resulting image will contain big-endian data and
6519 little-endian code.
6520
6521 @cindex TARGET1
6522 @kindex --target1-rel
6523 @kindex --target1-abs
6524 The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
6525 @samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
6526 or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
6527 and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
6528
6529 @cindex TARGET2
6530 @kindex --target2=@var{type}
6531 The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
6532 @samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
6533 meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
6534 @table @samp
6535 @item rel
6536 @samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
6537 @item abs
6538 @samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
6539 @item got-rel
6540 @samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
6541 @end table
6542
6543 @cindex FIX_V4BX
6544 @kindex --fix-v4bx
6545 The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
6546 specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
6547 interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
6548 also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
6549
6550 In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
6551 linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
6552 @code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
6553
6554 In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6555 relocations are ignored.
6556
6557 @cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
6558 @kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
6559 Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6560 relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
6561
6562 @smallexample
6563 TST rM, #1
6564 MOVEQ PC, rM
6565 BX Rn
6566 @end smallexample
6567
6568 This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
6569 and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
6570 condition flags, so may cause incorrect program behavior in rare cases.
6571
6572 @cindex USE_BLX
6573 @kindex --use-blx
6574 The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
6575 BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
6576 situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
6577 code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
6578 each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
6579
6580 This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
6581 specify it if you are using that target.
6582
6583 @cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
6584 @kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
6585 The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
6586 bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
6587 instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
6588 to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
6589 the support code can read the intended values.
6590
6591 The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
6592 intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
6593 and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
6594 intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
6595 full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
6596 you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
6597
6598 If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
6599 enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
6600 @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
6601 mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
6602 vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
6603 @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
6604
6605 If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6606 potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6607 such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
6608 first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
6609 instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
6610 the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
6611 are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
6612
6613 @cindex ARM1176 erratum workaround
6614 @kindex --fix-arm1176
6615 @kindex --no-fix-arm1176
6616 The @samp{--fix-arm1176} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum
6617 in certain ARM1176 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you
6618 are targeting ARM v6 (excluding ARM v6T2) or earlier. It can be disabled
6619 unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-arm1176}.
6620
6621 Further information is available in the ``ARM1176JZ-S and ARM1176JZF-S
6622 Programmer Advice Notice'' available on the ARM documentation website at:
6623 http://infocenter.arm.com/.
6624
6625 @cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
6626 @kindex --no-enum-size-warning
6627 The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6628 warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6629 enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6630 linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
6631 using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
6632 not be diagnosed.
6633
6634 @cindex NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING
6635 @kindex --no-wchar-size-warning
6636 The @option{--no-wchar-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6637 warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6638 @code{wchar_t} size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6639 linking of an object file using 32-bit @code{wchar_t} values with another
6640 using 16-bit @code{wchar_t} values will not be diagnosed.
6641
6642 @cindex PIC_VENEER
6643 @kindex --pic-veneer
6644 The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
6645 ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
6646 is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
6647 @samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
6648
6649 @cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
6650 @kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6651 The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
6652 code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
6653 perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
6654 placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
6655 controlled by the command line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
6656 The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
6657 duplicate stubs, increasing the code size. The linker will try to
6658 group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
6659 code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
6660 where they should be placed.
6661
6662 The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
6663 @option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
6664 placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed after the first
6665 branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
6666 placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
6667 value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
6668 exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
6669 A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
6670 linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
6671 from the input sections.
6672
6673 The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
6674 @samp{N = +1}.
6675
6676 Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
6677 only, because it relies on object files properties not present
6678 otherwise.
6679
6680 @cindex Cortex-A8 erratum workaround
6681 @kindex --fix-cortex-a8
6682 @kindex --no-fix-cortex-a8
6683 The @samp{--fix-cortex-a8} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum in certain Cortex-A8 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you are targeting the ARM v7-A architecture profile. It can be enabled otherwise by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a8}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a8}.
6684
6685 The erratum only affects Thumb-2 code. Please contact ARM for further details.
6686
6687 @cindex Cortex-A53 erratum 835769 workaround
6688 @kindex --fix-cortex-a53-835769
6689 @kindex --no-fix-cortex-a53-835769
6690 The @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769} switch enables a link-time workaround for erratum 835769 present on certain early revisions of Cortex-A53 processors. The workaround is disabled by default. It can be enabled by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a53-835769}.
6691
6692 Please contact ARM for further details.
6693
6694 @kindex --merge-exidx-entries
6695 @kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
6696 @cindex Merging exidx entries
6697 The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent exidx entries in debuginfo.
6698
6699 @kindex --long-plt
6700 @cindex 32-bit PLT entries
6701 The @samp{--long-plt} option enables the use of 16 byte PLT entries
6702 which support up to 4Gb of code. The default is to use 12 byte PLT
6703 entries which only support 512Mb of code.
6704
6705 @ifclear GENERIC
6706 @lowersections
6707 @end ifclear
6708 @end ifset
6709
6710 @ifset HPPA
6711 @ifclear GENERIC
6712 @raisesections
6713 @end ifclear
6714
6715 @node HPPA ELF32
6716 @section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
6717 @cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
6718 @kindex --multi-subspace
6719 When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
6720 import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
6721 The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
6722 stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
6723 multiple sub-spaces.
6724
6725 @cindex HPPA stub grouping
6726 @kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6727 Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
6728 stub sections located between groups of input sections.
6729 @samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
6730 sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
6731 a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
6732 the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
6733 conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
6734 prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
6735 A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
6736 branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
6737 @samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
6738 @command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
6739 detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
6740 positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
6741
6742 Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
6743 single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
6744 create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
6745 large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
6746
6747 @ifclear GENERIC
6748 @lowersections
6749 @end ifclear
6750 @end ifset
6751
6752 @ifset M68K
6753 @ifclear GENERIC
6754 @raisesections
6755 @end ifclear
6756
6757 @node M68K
6758 @section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6759
6760 @cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
6761 @kindex --got=@var{type}
6762 The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
6763 The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
6764 @samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
6765 the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
6766 @samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
6767 entries only at non-negative offsets.
6768 @samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
6769 entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
6770 support such GOTs.
6771 @samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
6772 output file. All GOT references from a single input object
6773 file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
6774 files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
6775
6776 @ifclear GENERIC
6777 @lowersections
6778 @end ifclear
6779 @end ifset
6780
6781 @ifset MIPS
6782 @ifclear GENERIC
6783 @raisesections
6784 @end ifclear
6785
6786 @node MIPS
6787 @section @command{ld} and the MIPS family
6788
6789 @cindex MIPS microMIPS instruction choice selection
6790 @kindex --insn32
6791 @kindex --no-insn32
6792 The @samp{--insn32} and @samp{--no-insn32} options control the choice of
6793 microMIPS instructions used in code generated by the linker, such as that
6794 in the PLT or lazy binding stubs, or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is
6795 used, then the linker only uses 32-bit instruction encodings. By default
6796 or if @samp{--no-insn32} is used, all instruction encodings are used,
6797 including 16-bit ones where possible.
6798
6799 @ifclear GENERIC
6800 @lowersections
6801 @end ifclear
6802 @end ifset
6803
6804 @ifset MMIX
6805 @ifclear GENERIC
6806 @raisesections
6807 @end ifclear
6808
6809 @node MMIX
6810 @section @code{ld} and MMIX
6811 For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
6812 @code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
6813 understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
6814 can translate between the two formats.
6815
6816 There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
6817 Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
6818 registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
6819 equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
6820 @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
6821 global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
6822 this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
6823 symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
6824
6825 Global symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
6826 @code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special.
6827 The default linker script uses these to set the default start address
6828 of a section.
6829
6830 Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
6831 are left out from an mmo file.
6832
6833 @ifclear GENERIC
6834 @lowersections
6835 @end ifclear
6836 @end ifset
6837
6838 @ifset MSP430
6839 @ifclear GENERIC
6840 @raisesections
6841 @end ifclear
6842
6843 @node MSP430
6844 @section @code{ld} and MSP430
6845 For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
6846 will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
6847 just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
6848
6849 @cindex MSP430 extra sections
6850 The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
6851
6852 @table @code
6853 @item @samp{.vectors}
6854 Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
6855
6856 @item @samp{.bootloader}
6857 Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
6858 in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6859
6860 @item @samp{.infomem}
6861 Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
6862 this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6863
6864 @item @samp{.infomemnobits}
6865 This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
6866 in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
6867
6868 @item @samp{.noinit}
6869 Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
6870
6871 The last two sections are used by gcc.
6872 @end table
6873
6874 @ifclear GENERIC
6875 @lowersections
6876 @end ifclear
6877 @end ifset
6878
6879 @ifset NDS32
6880 @ifclear GENERIC
6881 @raisesections
6882 @end ifclear
6883
6884 @node NDS32
6885 @section @code{ld} and NDS32
6886 @kindex relaxing on NDS32
6887 For NDS32, there are some options to select relaxation behavior. The linker
6888 relaxes objects according to these options.
6889
6890 @table @code
6891 @item @samp{--m[no-]fp-as-gp}
6892 Disable/enable fp-as-gp relaxation.
6893
6894 @item @samp{--mexport-symbols=FILE}
6895 Exporting symbols and their address into FILE as linker script.
6896
6897 @item @samp{--m[no-]ex9}
6898 Disable/enable link-time EX9 relaxation.
6899
6900 @item @samp{--mexport-ex9=FILE}
6901 Export the EX9 table after linking.
6902
6903 @item @samp{--mimport-ex9=FILE}
6904 Import the Ex9 table for EX9 relaxation.
6905
6906 @item @samp{--mupdate-ex9}
6907 Update the existing EX9 table.
6908
6909 @item @samp{--mex9-limit=NUM}
6910 Maximum number of entries in the ex9 table.
6911
6912 @item @samp{--mex9-loop-aware}
6913 Avoid generating the EX9 instruction inside the loop.
6914
6915 @item @samp{--m[no-]ifc}
6916 Disable/enable the link-time IFC optimization.
6917
6918 @item @samp{--mifc-loop-aware}
6919 Avoid generating the IFC instruction inside the loop.
6920 @end table
6921
6922 @ifclear GENERIC
6923 @lowersections
6924 @end ifclear
6925 @end ifset
6926
6927 @ifset NIOSII
6928 @ifclear GENERIC
6929 @raisesections
6930 @end ifclear
6931
6932 @node Nios II
6933 @section @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
6934 @cindex Nios II call relaxation
6935 @kindex --relax on Nios II
6936
6937 Call and immediate jump instructions on Nios II processors are limited to
6938 transferring control to addresses in the same 256MB memory segment,
6939 which may result in @command{ld} giving
6940 @samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
6941 The command-line option @option{--relax} enables the generation of
6942 trampolines that can access the entire 32-bit address space for calls
6943 outside the normal @code{call} and @code{jmpi} address range. These
6944 trampolines are inserted at section boundaries, so may not themselves
6945 be reachable if an input section and its associated call trampolines are
6946 larger than 256MB.
6947
6948 The @option{--relax} option is enabled by default unless @option{-r}
6949 is also specified. You can disable trampoline generation by using the
6950 @option{--no-relax} linker option. You can also disable this optimization
6951 locally by using the @samp{set .noat} directive in assembly-language
6952 source files, as the linker-inserted trampolines use the @code{at}
6953 register as a temporary.
6954
6955 Note that the linker @option{--relax} option is independent of assembler
6956 relaxation options, and that using the GNU assembler's @option{-relax-all}
6957 option interferes with the linker's more selective call instruction relaxation.
6958
6959 @ifclear GENERIC
6960 @lowersections
6961 @end ifclear
6962 @end ifset
6963
6964 @ifset POWERPC
6965 @ifclear GENERIC
6966 @raisesections
6967 @end ifclear
6968
6969 @node PowerPC ELF32
6970 @section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6971 @cindex PowerPC long branches
6972 @kindex --relax on PowerPC
6973 Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
6974 displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
6975 @samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
6976 @samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
6977 the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
6978 section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
6979 section exceeds 33M in size. You may combine @samp{-r} and
6980 @samp{--relax} to add trampolines in a partial link. In that case
6981 both branches to undefined symbols and inter-section branches are also
6982 considered potentially out of range, and trampolines inserted.
6983
6984 @cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
6985 @table @option
6986 @cindex PowerPC PLT
6987 @kindex --bss-plt
6988 @item --bss-plt
6989 Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
6990 generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
6991 the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
6992 writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
6993 @command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
6994 PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
6995 compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
6996 BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
6997
6998 @kindex --secure-plt
6999 @item --secure-plt
7000 @command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
7001 @samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
7002 when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
7003 layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
7004 style BSS PLT.
7005
7006 @cindex PowerPC GOT
7007 @kindex --sdata-got
7008 @item --sdata-got
7009 The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
7010 sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
7011 @code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
7012 section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
7013 @code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
7014 @code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
7015 @samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
7016 @code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
7017 PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
7018 pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
7019 GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
7020 really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
7021
7022 @cindex PowerPC stub symbols
7023 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
7024 @item --emit-stub-syms
7025 This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7026 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7027
7028 @cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
7029 @kindex --no-tls-optimize
7030 @item --no-tls-optimize
7031 PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7032 sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7033 disable the optimization.
7034 @end table
7035
7036 @ifclear GENERIC
7037 @lowersections
7038 @end ifclear
7039 @end ifset
7040
7041 @ifset POWERPC64
7042 @ifclear GENERIC
7043 @raisesections
7044 @end ifclear
7045
7046 @node PowerPC64 ELF64
7047 @section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
7048
7049 @cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
7050 @table @option
7051 @cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
7052 @kindex --stub-group-size
7053 @item --stub-group-size
7054 Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
7055 by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
7056 @samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
7057 sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
7058 a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
7059 the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
7060 conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
7061 prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
7062 A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
7063 branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
7064 @samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
7065 @command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
7066 detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
7067 positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
7068
7069 Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
7070 single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
7071 create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
7072 large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
7073
7074 @cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
7075 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
7076 @item --emit-stub-syms
7077 This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7078 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7079
7080 @cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
7081 @kindex --dotsyms
7082 @kindex --no-dotsyms
7083 @item --dotsyms, --no-dotsyms
7084 These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
7085 in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
7086 function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
7087 code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
7088 properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
7089 to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
7090 @samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
7091 dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
7092 feature.
7093
7094 @cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
7095 @kindex --no-tls-optimize
7096 @item --no-tls-optimize
7097 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7098 sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7099 disable the optimization.
7100
7101 @cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
7102 @kindex --no-opd-optimize
7103 @item --no-opd-optimize
7104 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
7105 corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
7106 the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
7107 Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
7108
7109 @cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
7110 @kindex --non-overlapping-opd
7111 @item --non-overlapping-opd
7112 Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
7113 @code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
7114 the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
7115 entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
7116
7117 @cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
7118 @kindex --no-toc-optimize
7119 @item --no-toc-optimize
7120 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
7121 entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
7122 reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
7123 marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
7124 marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
7125 relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
7126 unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
7127 reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
7128 discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
7129 reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
7130 code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
7131 optimization.
7132
7133 @cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
7134 @kindex --no-multi-toc
7135 @item --no-multi-toc
7136 If given any toc option besides @code{-mcmodel=medium} or
7137 @code{-mcmodel=large}, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model
7138 where TOC
7139 entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
7140 total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
7141 grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
7142 TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
7143 calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
7144 help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
7145 64K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
7146 Use this option to turn off this feature.
7147
7148 @cindex PowerPC64 TOC sorting
7149 @kindex --no-toc-sort
7150 @item --no-toc-sort
7151 By default, @command{ld} sorts TOC sections so that those whose file
7152 happens to have a section called @code{.init} or @code{.fini} are
7153 placed first, followed by TOC sections referenced by code generated
7154 with PowerPC64 gcc's @code{-mcmodel=small}, and lastly TOC sections
7155 referenced only by code generated with PowerPC64 gcc's
7156 @code{-mcmodel=medium} or @code{-mcmodel=large} options. Doing this
7157 results in better TOC grouping for multi-TOC. Use this option to turn
7158 off this feature.
7159
7160 @cindex PowerPC64 PLT stub alignment
7161 @kindex --plt-align
7162 @kindex --no-plt-align
7163 @item --plt-align
7164 @itemx --no-plt-align
7165 Use these options to control whether individual PLT call stubs are
7166 padded so that they don't cross a 32-byte boundary, or to the
7167 specified power of two boundary when using @code{--plt-align=}. Note
7168 that this isn't alignment in the usual sense. By default PLT call
7169 stubs are packed tightly.
7170
7171 @cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub static chain
7172 @kindex --plt-static-chain
7173 @kindex --no-plt-static-chain
7174 @item --plt-static-chain
7175 @itemx --no-plt-static-chain
7176 Use these options to control whether PLT call stubs load the static
7177 chain pointer (r11). @code{ld} defaults to not loading the static
7178 chain since there is never any need to do so on a PLT call.
7179
7180 @cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub thread safety
7181 @kindex --plt-thread-safe
7182 @kindex --no-plt-thread-safe
7183 @item --plt-thread-safe
7184 @itemx --no-thread-safe
7185 With power7's weakly ordered memory model, it is possible when using
7186 lazy binding for ld.so to update a plt entry in one thread and have
7187 another thread see the individual plt entry words update in the wrong
7188 order, despite ld.so carefully writing in the correct order and using
7189 memory write barriers. To avoid this we need some sort of read
7190 barrier in the call stub, or use LD_BIND_NOW=1. By default, @code{ld}
7191 looks for calls to commonly used functions that create threads, and if
7192 seen, adds the necessary barriers. Use these options to change the
7193 default behaviour.
7194 @end table
7195
7196 @ifclear GENERIC
7197 @lowersections
7198 @end ifclear
7199 @end ifset
7200
7201 @ifset SPU
7202 @ifclear GENERIC
7203 @raisesections
7204 @end ifclear
7205
7206 @node SPU ELF
7207 @section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
7208
7209 @cindex SPU ELF options
7210 @table @option
7211
7212 @cindex SPU plugins
7213 @kindex --plugin
7214 @item --plugin
7215 This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
7216
7217 @cindex SPU overlays
7218 @kindex --no-overlays
7219 @item --no-overlays
7220 Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
7221 regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
7222 @command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
7223 turns off all this special overlay handling.
7224
7225 @cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
7226 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
7227 @item --emit-stub-syms
7228 This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
7229 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7230
7231 @cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
7232 @kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
7233 @item --extra-overlay-stubs
7234 This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
7235 function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
7236 on calls to non-overlay regions.
7237
7238 @cindex SPU local store size
7239 @kindex --local-store=lo:hi
7240 @item --local-store=lo:hi
7241 @command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
7242 the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
7243 range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
7244
7245 @cindex SPU
7246 @kindex --stack-analysis
7247 @item --stack-analysis
7248 SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
7249 unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
7250 under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
7251 @command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
7252 @command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
7253 determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
7254 for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
7255 for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
7256 for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
7257 find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
7258 and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
7259 under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
7260 dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
7261 is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
7262 and calls will be given.
7263
7264 @cindex SPU
7265 @kindex --emit-stack-syms
7266 @item --emit-stack-syms
7267 This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
7268 in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
7269 These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
7270 functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
7271 functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
7272 such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
7273 The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
7274 @code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
7275 @end table
7276
7277 @ifclear GENERIC
7278 @lowersections
7279 @end ifclear
7280 @end ifset
7281
7282 @ifset TICOFF
7283 @ifclear GENERIC
7284 @raisesections
7285 @end ifclear
7286
7287 @node TI COFF
7288 @section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
7289 @cindex TI COFF versions
7290 @kindex --format=@var{version}
7291 The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
7292 TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
7293 also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
7294 format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
7295 header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
7296
7297 @ifclear GENERIC
7298 @lowersections
7299 @end ifclear
7300 @end ifset
7301
7302 @ifset WIN32
7303 @ifclear GENERIC
7304 @raisesections
7305 @end ifclear
7306
7307 @node WIN32
7308 @section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
7309
7310 This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
7311 See @ref{Options,,Command Line Options} for detailed description of the
7312 command line options mentioned here.
7313
7314 @table @emph
7315 @cindex import libraries
7316 @item import libraries
7317 The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
7318 libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
7319 regular static archives and are handled as any other static
7320 archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
7321 support for creating such libraries provided with the
7322 @samp{--out-implib} command line option.
7323
7324 @item exporting DLL symbols
7325 @cindex exporting DLL symbols
7326 The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
7327
7328 @table @emph
7329 @item using auto-export functionality
7330 @cindex using auto-export functionality
7331 By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
7332 which is controlled by the following command line options:
7333
7334 @itemize
7335 @item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
7336 @item --exclude-symbols
7337 @item --exclude-libs
7338 @item --exclude-modules-for-implib
7339 @item --version-script
7340 @end itemize
7341
7342 When auto-export is in operation, @command{ld} will export all the non-local
7343 (global and common) symbols it finds in a DLL, with the exception of a few
7344 symbols known to belong to the system's runtime and libraries. As it will
7345 often not be desirable to export all of a DLL's symbols, which may include
7346 private functions that are not part of any public interface, the command-line
7347 options listed above may be used to filter symbols out from the list for
7348 exporting. The @samp{--output-def} option can be used in order to see the
7349 final list of exported symbols with all exclusions taken into effect.
7350
7351 If @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
7352 command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
7353 if either of the following are true:
7354
7355 @itemize
7356 @item A DEF file is used.
7357 @item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
7358 @end itemize
7359
7360 @item using a DEF file
7361 @cindex using a DEF file
7362 Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
7363 an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
7364 exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
7365 name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
7366 command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
7367
7368 @example
7369 gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
7370 @end example
7371
7372 Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
7373 @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7374
7375 Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
7376
7377 @example
7378 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
7379
7380 EXPORTS
7381 foo
7382 bar
7383 _bar = bar
7384 another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
7385 var1 DATA
7386 doo = foo == foo2
7387 eoo DATA == var1
7388 @end example
7389
7390 This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and seven
7391 symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
7392 alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
7393 by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
7394 @code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
7395 @code{var1} is declared to be a data object. The @samp{doo} symbol in
7396 export library is an alias of @samp{foo}, which gets the string name
7397 in export table @samp{foo2}. The @samp{eoo} symbol is an data export
7398 symbol, which gets in export table the name @samp{var1}.
7399
7400 The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
7401 name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
7402 the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
7403
7404 When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
7405 library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
7406 @code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
7407 executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
7408
7409 With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
7410 specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
7411 non-default base address for the image.
7412
7413 If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
7414 or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
7415 filename specified on the command line.
7416
7417 The complete specification of an export symbol is:
7418
7419 @example
7420 EXPORTS
7421 ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
7422 | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
7423 [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] [== <name3>] ) *
7424 @end example
7425
7426 Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
7427 @samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
7428 @samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
7429 @samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
7430 Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
7431 @samp{<integer>} alias. The optional @samp{<name3>} is the to be used
7432 string in import/export table for the symbol.
7433
7434 The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
7435
7436 @code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
7437 will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
7438 by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
7439 linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
7440 library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
7441
7442 @code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
7443 The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
7444 the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
7445 @code{*_imp__foo}).
7446
7447 @code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
7448 well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
7449 read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
7450 variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
7451 the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
7452 extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
7453 application will behave unexpectedly.
7454
7455 @code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
7456 it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
7457 symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
7458 API at runtime or by by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
7459 the DLL without an import library.
7460
7461 See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
7462 other DEF file statements
7463
7464 @cindex creating a DEF file
7465 While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
7466 with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command line option.
7467
7468 @item Using decorations
7469 @cindex Using decorations
7470 Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
7471 itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
7472 declared as:
7473
7474 @example
7475 __declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
7476 __declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
7477 @end example
7478
7479 All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
7480 any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
7481 this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
7482 the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7483
7484 Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
7485 decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
7486 instead:
7487
7488 @example
7489 __declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
7490 __declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
7491 @end example
7492
7493 This complicates the structure of library header files, because
7494 when included by the library itself the header must declare the
7495 variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
7496 code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
7497 of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
7498 omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
7499 @samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
7500 information.
7501 @end table
7502
7503 @cindex automatic data imports
7504 @item automatic data imports
7505 The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
7506 by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
7507 compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
7508 issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
7509 code to these platforms, especially for large
7510 c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
7511 initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
7512 decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
7513 platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
7514 command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
7515 The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
7516 suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
7517 trigger the feature's use.
7518
7519 auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
7520 additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
7521
7522 "variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
7523 documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
7524
7525 The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
7526 occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
7527 One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
7528 below.
7529
7530 @cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
7531 For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
7532 object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
7533 offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
7534 field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
7535 in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
7536 without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
7537 The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
7538 references.
7539
7540 The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
7541 be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
7542 themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
7543 runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
7544 compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
7545 support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
7546 run without error on an older system.
7547
7548 @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
7549 enabled as needed.
7550
7551 @cindex direct linking to a dll
7552 @item direct linking to a dll
7553 The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
7554 including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
7555 libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
7556 traditional import library method, especially when linking large
7557 libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
7558 function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
7559 though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
7560 storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
7561 tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
7562 large or complex libraries when using import libs.
7563
7564 Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
7565 @samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
7566 of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
7567 perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
7568 select the dll instead of an import library.
7569
7570
7571 For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
7572 to find, in the first directory of its search path,
7573
7574 @example
7575 libxxx.dll.a
7576 xxx.dll.a
7577 libxxx.a
7578 xxx.lib
7579 cygxxx.dll (*)
7580 libxxx.dll
7581 xxx.dll
7582 @end example
7583
7584 before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
7585
7586 (*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
7587 where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
7588 @samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
7589 file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
7590 @samp{cygxxx.dll}.
7591
7592 Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
7593 @samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
7594 was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
7595 various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
7596 could coexist on the same machine.
7597
7598 The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
7599 applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
7600 libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
7601
7602 @example
7603 bin/
7604 cygxxx.dll
7605 lib/
7606 libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
7607 libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
7608 @end example
7609
7610 Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
7611 done two ways:
7612
7613 1. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
7614 @example
7615 gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
7616 @end example
7617
7618 However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
7619 (@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
7620 @samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
7621 not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
7622
7623 2. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
7624 directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
7625 should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
7626 making the app/dll.
7627
7628 @example
7629 ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
7630 @end example
7631
7632 Then you can link without any make environment changes.
7633
7634 @example
7635 gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
7636 @end example
7637
7638 This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
7639 perfectly legal
7640
7641 @example
7642 bin/
7643 cygxxx-5.dll
7644 lib/
7645 libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
7646 @end example
7647
7648 Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
7649 even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
7650 @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
7651
7652 Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
7653 wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
7654
7655 1. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
7656 work with auto-imported data.
7657
7658 2. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
7659 import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
7660 symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
7661 for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
7662 possible to do this without an import lib.
7663
7664 3. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
7665 critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
7666 in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
7667 stdcall-decorated assembly names.
7668
7669 So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
7670 true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
7671 a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
7672 binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
7673 massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
7674 requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
7675 will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
7676
7677 @item symbol aliasing
7678 @table @emph
7679 @item adding additional names
7680 Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
7681 A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
7682 exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
7683 when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
7684 import library. Consider the following DEF file:
7685
7686 @example
7687 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
7688
7689 EXPORTS
7690 foo
7691 _foo = foo
7692 @end example
7693
7694 The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
7695
7696 Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
7697 source code using the "weak" attribute:
7698
7699 @example
7700 void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
7701 void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
7702 @end example
7703
7704 See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
7705 symbols.
7706
7707 @item renaming symbols
7708 Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
7709 kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
7710 @samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
7711 DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
7712 created). In the following example:
7713
7714 @example
7715 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
7716
7717 EXPORTS
7718 _foo = foo
7719 @end example
7720
7721 The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
7722 @samp{_foo}.
7723 @end table
7724
7725 Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
7726 unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command line option is used.
7727 If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
7728 @emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
7729 that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
7730 @samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
7731 renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
7732 to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
7733 the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
7734 In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
7735 which is probably not what you wanted.
7736
7737 @cindex weak externals
7738 @item weak externals
7739 The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
7740 weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
7741 defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
7742 are three variants of weak externals:
7743 @itemize
7744 @item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
7745 called lazy externals.
7746 @item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
7747 This form is not presently implemented.
7748 @item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
7749 implemented.
7750 @end itemize
7751 As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
7752 are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
7753 uses a default value.
7754
7755 @cindex aligned common symbols
7756 @item aligned common symbols
7757 As a GNU extension to the PE file format, it is possible to specify the
7758 desired alignment for a common symbol. This information is conveyed from
7759 the assembler or compiler to the linker by means of GNU-specific commands
7760 carried in the object file's @samp{.drectve} section, which are recognized
7761 by @command{ld} and respected when laying out the common symbols. Native
7762 tools will be able to process object files employing this GNU extension,
7763 but will fail to respect the alignment instructions, and may issue noisy
7764 warnings about unknown linker directives.
7765
7766 @end table
7767
7768 @ifclear GENERIC
7769 @lowersections
7770 @end ifclear
7771 @end ifset
7772
7773 @ifset XTENSA
7774 @ifclear GENERIC
7775 @raisesections
7776 @end ifclear
7777
7778 @node Xtensa
7779 @section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
7780
7781 @cindex Xtensa processors
7782 The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
7783 @code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
7784 specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
7785 keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
7786 example, with the command:
7787
7788 @smallexample
7789 SECTIONS
7790 @{
7791 .text : @{
7792 *(.literal .text)
7793 @}
7794 @}
7795 @end smallexample
7796
7797 @noindent
7798 @command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
7799 and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
7800 literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
7801 interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
7802 group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
7803 files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
7804 and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
7805
7806 @cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
7807 @cindex relaxing on Xtensa
7808 Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
7809 provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
7810 is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
7811 literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
7812 will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
7813 location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
7814 the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
7815 unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
7816 @code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
7817 range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
7818
7819 For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
7820 to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
7821 instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
7822 instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
7823 instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
7824 @code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
7825 hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
7826 By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
7827 switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
7828 density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
7829 instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
7830 performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
7831 linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
7832 a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
7833
7834 The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
7835 control the linker:
7836
7837 @cindex Xtensa options
7838 @table @option
7839 @item --size-opt
7840 When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
7841 more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
7842 no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
7843 alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
7844 preserve the correctness of the code.
7845 @end table
7846
7847 @ifclear GENERIC
7848 @lowersections
7849 @end ifclear
7850 @end ifset
7851
7852 @ifclear SingleFormat
7853 @node BFD
7854 @chapter BFD
7855
7856 @cindex back end
7857 @cindex object file management
7858 @cindex object formats available
7859 @kindex objdump -i
7860 The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
7861 These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
7862 object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
7863 format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
7864 it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
7865 associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
7866 object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
7867 (@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
7868 list all the formats available for your configuration.
7869
7870 @cindex BFD requirements
7871 @cindex requirements for BFD
7872 As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
7873 several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
7874 BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
7875 formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
7876 been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
7877 BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
7878 may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
7879
7880 One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
7881 mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
7882 useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
7883 conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
7884
7885 @menu
7886 * BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
7887 @end menu
7888
7889 @node BFD outline
7890 @section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
7891 @cindex opening object files
7892 @include bfdsumm.texi
7893 @end ifclear
7894
7895 @node Reporting Bugs
7896 @chapter Reporting Bugs
7897 @cindex bugs in @command{ld}
7898 @cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
7899
7900 Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
7901
7902 Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
7903 it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
7904 to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
7905 work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
7906 @command{ld}.
7907
7908 In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
7909 information that enables us to fix the bug.
7910
7911 @menu
7912 * Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
7913 * Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
7914 @end menu
7915
7916 @node Bug Criteria
7917 @section Have You Found a Bug?
7918 @cindex bug criteria
7919
7920 If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
7921
7922 @itemize @bullet
7923 @cindex fatal signal
7924 @cindex linker crash
7925 @cindex crash of linker
7926 @item
7927 If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
7928 @command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
7929
7930 @cindex error on valid input
7931 @item
7932 If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
7933
7934 @cindex invalid input
7935 @item
7936 If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
7937 may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
7938 object files are correct.
7939
7940 @item
7941 If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
7942 improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
7943 @end itemize
7944
7945 @node Bug Reporting
7946 @section How to Report Bugs
7947 @cindex bug reports
7948 @cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
7949
7950 A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
7951 products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
7952 recommend you contact that organization first.
7953
7954 You can find contact information for many support companies and
7955 individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
7956 distribution.
7957
7958 @ifset BUGURL
7959 Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
7960 @value{BUGURL}.
7961 @end ifset
7962
7963 The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
7964 @strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
7965 fact or leave it out, state it!
7966
7967 Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
7968 problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
7969 assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
7970 matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
7971 the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
7972 location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
7973 were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
7974 into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
7975 specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
7976 and the most helpful.
7977
7978 Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
7979 the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
7980 on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
7981
7982 Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
7983 bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
7984 respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
7985 You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
7986
7987 To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
7988
7989 @itemize @bullet
7990 @item
7991 The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
7992 the @samp{--version} argument.
7993
7994 Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
7995 the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
7996
7997 @item
7998 Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
7999 patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
8000
8001 @item
8002 The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
8003 version number.
8004
8005 @item
8006 What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
8007 ``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
8008
8009 @item
8010 The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
8011 observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
8012 list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
8013 sufficient.
8014
8015 If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
8016 and then we might not encounter the bug.
8017
8018 @item
8019 A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
8020 bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
8021 provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
8022 bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
8023 state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
8024 requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
8025 we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
8026 attachments are best.
8027
8028 If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
8029 @code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
8030 object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
8031 @code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
8032 how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
8033
8034 @item
8035 A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
8036 incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
8037
8038 Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
8039 will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
8040 not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
8041 a chance to make a mistake.
8042
8043 Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
8044 say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
8045 copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
8046 C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
8047 and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
8048 fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
8049 you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
8050 any conclusion from our observations.
8051
8052 @item
8053 If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
8054 diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
8055 @samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
8056 If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
8057 context, not by line number.
8058
8059 The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
8060 sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
8061 @end itemize
8062
8063 Here are some things that are not necessary:
8064
8065 @itemize @bullet
8066 @item
8067 A description of the envelope of the bug.
8068
8069 Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
8070 which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
8071 changes will not affect it.
8072
8073 This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
8074 will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
8075 with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
8076 We recommend that you save your time for something else.
8077
8078 Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
8079 of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
8080 output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
8081 less time, and so on.
8082
8083 However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
8084 report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
8085
8086 @item
8087 A patch for the bug.
8088
8089 A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
8090 the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
8091 a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
8092 to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
8093
8094 Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
8095 construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
8096 through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
8097 able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
8098 fixed.
8099
8100 And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
8101 patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
8102 help us to understand.
8103
8104 @item
8105 A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
8106
8107 Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
8108 things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
8109 @end itemize
8110
8111 @node MRI
8112 @appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
8113 @cindex MRI compatibility
8114 To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
8115 linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
8116 alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
8117 described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
8118 simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
8119 @command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
8120 linker commands; these commands are described here.
8121
8122 In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
8123 file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
8124 features to make use of them.
8125
8126 You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
8127 @samp{-c} command-line option.
8128
8129 Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
8130 command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
8131 blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
8132 MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
8133 issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
8134
8135 Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
8136
8137 You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
8138 lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
8139 The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
8140
8141 @table @code
8142 @cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
8143 @item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
8144 @itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
8145 Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
8146 the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
8147 @code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
8148 your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
8149 script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
8150 commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
8151 input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
8152 @code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
8153
8154 @cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
8155 @item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
8156 Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
8157 in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
8158
8159 @var{in-secname} may be an integer.
8160
8161 @cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
8162 @item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
8163 Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
8164 @var{expression} should be a power of two.
8165
8166 @cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
8167 @item BASE @var{expression}
8168 Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
8169 absolute addresses) in the output file.
8170
8171 @cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
8172 @item CHIP @var{expression}
8173 @itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
8174 This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
8175
8176 @cindex @code{END} (MRI)
8177 @item END
8178 This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
8179
8180 @cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
8181 @item FORMAT @var{output-format}
8182 Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
8183 language, but restricted to one of these output formats:
8184
8185 @enumerate
8186 @item
8187 S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
8188
8189 @item
8190 IEEE, if @var{output-format} is @samp{IEEE}
8191
8192 @item
8193 COFF (the @samp{coff-m68k} variant in BFD), if @var{output-format} is
8194 @samp{COFF}
8195 @end enumerate
8196
8197 @cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
8198 @item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
8199 Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
8200 @command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
8201
8202 The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
8203 same line, with no change in its effect.
8204
8205 @cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
8206 @item LOAD @var{filename}
8207 @itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
8208 Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
8209 same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
8210 command line.
8211
8212 @cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
8213 @item NAME @var{output-name}
8214 @var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
8215 MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
8216 option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
8217
8218 @cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
8219 @item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
8220 @itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
8221 Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
8222 order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
8223 script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
8224 sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
8225 file, in the order specified.
8226
8227 @cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
8228 @item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
8229 @itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
8230 @itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
8231 Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
8232 @var{name} used in the linker input files.
8233
8234 @cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
8235 @item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
8236 @itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
8237 @itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
8238 You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
8239 specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
8240 If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
8241 @var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
8242 @end table
8243
8244 @node GNU Free Documentation License
8245 @appendix GNU Free Documentation License
8246 @include fdl.texi
8247
8248 @node LD Index
8249 @unnumbered LD Index
8250
8251 @printindex cp
8252
8253 @tex
8254 % I think something like @@colophon should be in texinfo. In the
8255 % meantime:
8256 \long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
8257 \centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
8258 \centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
8259 \centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
8260 \centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
8261 \centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
8262 \centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
8263 \centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
8264 \page\colophon
8265 % Blame: doc@@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
8266 @end tex
8267
8268 @bye
This page took 0.204584 seconds and 4 git commands to generate.